FIBER OPTIC PRODUCTS FOR THE MINING INDUSTRY

Transcription

1 FIBER OPTIC PRODUCTS FOR THE MINING INDUSTRY

2 Founded in 1984, AFL is an international manufacturer providing end-to-end solutions to the energy, service provider, enterprise and industrial markets as well as several emerging markets. AFL s products are in use in over 130 countries and include fiber optic cable and hardware, transmission and substation accessories, outside plant equipment, connectivity, test and inspection equipment, fusion splicers and training. AFL also offers a wide variety of services supporting data center, enterprise, wireless and outside plant applications. AFL is dedicated to bringing our customers a quality product as well as delivering superior value.

3 Fiber Optic Cable Table of Contents Fiber Optic Cable Indoor Cable Breakout Cable...3 Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable...5 Indoor/Outdoor Riser Tight Buffered Cable...7 Indoor/Outdoor Multi-unit Riser Tight Buffered Cable...9 Armored Tight Buffered Circular Premise Cable...11 Copper/Fiber Composite Cable...13 Tactical Cable Tactical Tight Buffered Cable...15 Optical Ground Wire (OPGW) AlumaCore OPGW...17 CentraCore OPGW...18 HexaCore OPGW...19 All-Dielectric Self Supporting Cable (AFL-ADSS ) Aerial Drop Cable...20 Mini-Span ADSS Cable...21 All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable...27 SkyWrap...44 All-Dielectric Self Supporting Cable Accessories Mini-Bracket Mini Formed Wire Tangent Support (FTS)...46 Trunnion Assemblies Single and Double Cables...47 Mini-Dead Ends...49 Wedge Dead End...50 Wood Pole Clamps for OPGW...51 Urethane Downlead Cushion Clamps...51 Spiral Vibration Damper for ADSS or OPGW Cable...52 Loose Tube Cable Non-Armored OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SJ)...53 Single-Jacket Single-Armor OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SASJ)...55 All-Dielectric Armored Rodent-Resistant OSP Loose Tube (LN Series). 57 Uniflex Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable...59 Riser Single-Jacket I/O Loose Tube (LV Series SJ)...60 Fiber Inside Plant Rack Mount Panels LightLink LANSystem 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel...66 Xpress Fiber Management (XFM ) 4RU Patch Panel...68 Indoor Splicing and Distribution Enclosures LightLink 500 Optical Splicing and Distribution Enclosure...69 Fiber Demarcation OptiNID 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure...70 OptiNID 500 Optical Demarcation Closure...71 OptiNID Optical Demarcation Accessories...72 Panel Accessories LightLink Adapter Plates...74 Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels...77 Optical Interconnect Modules Poli-MOD Patch and Splice Module...78 Fiber Optic Connectors and Components Field Master Field-Installable Connectors...80 Field Master Tool Kit...81 Crimp Tool for Field Master Connectors...81 FASTConnect Field-Installable Connectors...82 FUSEConnect Field-Installable Connectors...84 FUSEConnect Tool Kit and Accessories...85 Optical Terminators and Fanout Kits...86 Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies Duplex Cable Assemblies...87 Multi-Fiber Cable Assemblies or (800)

4 Fiber Optic Cable Table of Contents (cont.) Splice Closures and Accessories LightGuard (LG) Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures...89 Peel & Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures.. 90 LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...91 LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...92 LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...93 LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...94 MuxGuard 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...95 Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM...96 LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...97 LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure...99 LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure LightGuard Sealed Splice Closure Accessories LightGuard (LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures. 105 LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures.113 LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure LightGuard Aerial Splice Closure Accessories Splice Closure Accessories Interchangeable Grommets LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays Fiber Storage Units Fiber Storage Units for ADSS Fiber Optic Cable Fusion Splicers and Accessories Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer Fujikura 62S Fusion Splicer Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Portable Tripod Workstation ASW-02 Splicing Workstation Splice Protection Sleeves Fiber Optic Test and Inspection Equipment OTDRs and Accessories M710 Multifunction OTDR M310 Enterprise OTDR M210e Hand-held OTDR OTDR Fiber Rings Fiber Optic Loss Test Kits Optical Loss Test Kits SMLP, SLP, MLP Series Laser Sources, Inspection Microscopes and Talk Sets VFI2 and HiLite Visual Fault Identifiers OFS300 Optical Microscope FTS2 Series Fiber Optic Talk Sets Cleaning Accessories One-Click Cleaner Series Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid. 176 FiberWipes FCP1 Fiber Optic Cleaning Kits or (800)

5 Fiber Optic Cable Breakout Cable Breakout cables combine multiple fiber flexibility with the strength of individually jacketed fibers. Breakout cables from AFL can be terminated for fanout assemblies. Breakout cable is available in counts of 2-24 fibers. Applications Rugged multi-fiber cross-connects Intrabuilding "backbone" Fiber "backbone" to communications closet Cable Components Features Sub-units printed every 6 inches Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A / GR-409-CORE Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) MSHA approved for mining applications Tight buffer and sub-unit jacket are available in a variety of colors Fiber Specifications OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION 0ºC to +70ºC OPERATING 0ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

6 Fiber Optic Cable Breakout Cable Mechanical Data NOMINAL TENSION BENDING RADIUS FIBER DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) CABLE TYPE COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM Riser Breakout Cable BR ## (8.5) 44 (65) 150 (660) 45 (198) 5.1 (12.8) 3.4 (8.5) BR ## (10.1) 64 (95) 150 (660) 45 (198) 6.0 (15.2) 4.0 (10.1) BR ## (11.6) 84 (125) 150 (660) 45 (198) 6.9 (17.4) 4.6 (11.6) BR ## (14.7) 138 (205) 150 (660) 45 (198) 8.7 (22.1) 5.8 (14.7) BR ## (16.6) 118 (175) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 11.4 (29.0) 7.6 (19.3) Plenum Breakout Cable BP ## (9.0) 57 (85) 100 (440) 30 (132) 5.3 (13.5) 3.6 (9.0) BP ## (10.6) 79 (118) 100 (440) 30 (132) 6.3 (15.9) 4.2 (10.6) BP ## (12.2) 105 (156) 100 (440) 30 (132) 7.2 (18.3) 4.8 (12.2) BP ## (15.5) 169 (252) 100 (440) 30 (132) 9.2 (23.2) 6.1 (15.5) Fiber Types please specify fiber type with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. # Outer Jacket/Sub-unit Color please specify outer jacket/sub-unit color when ordering (see below) 1=Blue 2=Orange 3=Green 4=Brown 5=Slate 6=White 7=Red 8=Black 9=Yellow A=Violet B=Rose C=Aqua Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM REEL F Reel Height (inches) 42 Reel Outside Width (inches) 36 Drum Diameter (inches) 23 Reel Weight (lbs) 148 CAPACITY: meters (feet) 4 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 6 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 8 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 12 Fiber Breakout 1,600 / (5,250) or (800) A 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

7 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable AFL s Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cables are perfectly suited for rugged applications and installations requiring increased performance. Available in 2 to 12 fiber counts, these cables feature a UV- and fungal-resistant semi-pressure extruded outer jacket. The individual sub-units measure 2.5 mm, allowing for ease of field termination, and use water-blocking aramid which further protects the tight-buffered fiber. Cable Components 2-Fiber PVC outer jacket 2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit µm buffered fiber - water swellable aramid yarn strength members - PVC jacket strength member (2) ripcord Features Fungus, water and UV-resistant PVC jacket featuring SP extrusion technology Riser-rated with water-blocked sub-units Sub-units and tight buffer available in a variety of colors Tested to meet or exceed GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) MSHA approved for mining applications 12-Fiber Applications Harsh Environment Mining Industrial Campus Environment PVC outer jacket 2.5 mm simplex sub-unit µm buffered fiber - water swellable aramid yarn strength members - PVC jacket upjacketed FRP center strength member ripcord Fiber Specifications OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -20ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +70ºC A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

8 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable Mechanical Data FIBER NOMINAL DIAMETER WEIGHT TENSION LBS (N) BENDING RADIUS INCHES (CM) COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM BX ## (7.5) 32 (49) 300 (1335) 150 (667) 3.8 (9.6) 2.5 (6.4) BX ## (8.2) 37 (55) 450 (2000) 185 (825) 3.9 (9.9) 3.2 (8.1) BX ## (9.6) 54 (80) 750 (3360) 375 (1680) 4.8 (12.2) 3.8 (9.7) BX ## (11.1) 75 (111) 1000 (4450) 425 (1750) 6.6 (16.8) 4.4 (11.2) BX ## (14.5) 165 (245) 1425 (6360) 570 (2535) 8.5 (21.6) 5.7 (14.5) Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. # Outer Jacket Color Replace hashtag (#) in AFL number with number in the Cable Jacket Color table below. Cable Jacket Color Options 1 - Blue 8 - Black 2 - Orange 9 - Yellow 3 - Green A - Violet 4 - Brown B - Rose 5 - Slate C - Aqua 6 - White K - Erika Violet (RAL 4003) 7 - Red Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM REEL F Reel Height (inches) 42 Reel Outside Width (inches) 36 Drum Diameter (inches) 23 Reel Weight (lbs) 148 CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 4 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 6 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 8 Fiber Breakout 2,500 / (8,200) 12 Fiber Breakout 1,600 / (5,250) A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

9 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Riser Tight Buffered Cable Indoor/Outdoor Tight Buffered cables are specified for campus network cabling between buildings where interbuilding lengths are short enough that the installer can recognize savings from the lower costs of terminating tight buffered cables. For indoor applications the cable is OFNR listed. For outdoor applications the cable is manufactured with an outer jacket that incorporates a UV stabilizer for protection against exposure to the sun plus an anti-fungus protection for use in underground applications. Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -20ºC to +75ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +75ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC Fiber Specifications Features Cables are water blocked and meet water penetration requirements of GR-20-CORE (this helps ensure that any damage to cable is restricted to a repairable length of several meters) Outer jacket is moisture-resistant, fungus-resistent and UV resistant for outdoor use With a Riser rating, this cable can be used in all environments: Riser, general inside plant and outside plant Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A / GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S MSHA approved for mining applications Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) Cable Components OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

10 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Riser Tight Buffered Cable Mechanical Data CABLE TYPE Indoor/Outdoor Tight Buffered Cable NOMINAL TENSION BENDING RADIUS DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) RISER FIBER COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM KR # (4.8) 14 (21) 150 (660) 45 (198) 2.8 (7.2) 1.9 (4.8) KR # (4.8) 15 (23) 150 (660) 45 (198) 2.8 (7.2) 1.9 (4.8) KR # (5.3) 19 (28) 150 (660) 45 (198) 3.1 (8.0) 2.1 (5.3) KR # (5.6 ) 23 (33) 150 (660) 45 (198) 3.3 (8.4) 2.2 (5.6) KR # (6.5) 26 (38) 150 (660) 45 (198) 3.5 (9.0) 2.6 (6.5) KR # (8.0) 40 (59) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 4.7 (12.0) 3.1 (8.0) KR # (8.7) 46 (69) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 5.2 (13.1) 3.4 (8.7) Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. # Outer Jacket Color Replace hashtag (#) in AFL number with number in the Cable Jacket Color table below. Cable Jacket Color Options 1 - Blue 8 - Black 2 - Orange 9 - Yellow 3 - Green A - Violet 4 - Brown B - Rose 5 - Slate C - Aqua 6 - White K - Erika Violet (RAL 4003) 7 - Red Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM FIBER BOX* REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E Reel/Box Height (inches) Reel/Box Outside Width (inches) Drum Diameter (inches) Reel Weight (lbs) CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 2 Fiber 305 (1,000) 1,000 (3,281) 3,200 (10,500) 5,000 (16,404) 4 Fiber 305 (1,000) 1,000 (3,281) 3,200 (10,500) 5,000 (16,404) 6 Fiber 305 (1,000) 2,000 (6,561) 3,400 (11,154) 5,000 (16,404) 8 Fiber 1,700 (5,577) 4,000 (9,514) 5,000 (16,404) 12 Fiber 1,250 (4,100) 2,100 ( 6,890) 18 Fiber 1,500 (4,921) 24 Fiber 1,500 (4,921) * Add suffix " XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above. EXAMPLE: KR MFBOX Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of KR cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data sheet. A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

11 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Multi-unit Riser Tight Buffered Cable AFL now offers high fiber count Indoor/Outdoor Riser Cables. Waterblocked 12-fiber sub-units are helically stranded to provide sub-unitized cables ranging from 24 to 72 fiber counts. These cables are OFNR listed for indoor applications. Both the sub-unit jackets and outer sheath contain a UV stabilizer and anti-fungus protection for use in outdoor applications. Sub-units contain a water-swellable aramid and 12 tight buffered fibers. Features Sub-units are water blocked and meet water penetration requirements of GR-20-CORE (this helps ensure that any damage to cable is restricted to a repairable length of several meters) Outer jacket is moisture-resistant, fungus-resistent and UV resistant for outdoor use With a Riser rating, this cable can be used in all environments: Riser, general inside plant and outside plant Sub-units are tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A / GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) MSHA approved for mining applications Cable Components Fiber Specifications OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -20ºC to +75ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +75ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC or (800) A 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

12 Fiber Optic Cable Indoor/Outdoor Multi-unit Riser Tight Buffered Cable Mechanical Data CABLE TYPE Indoor/Outdoor Tight Buffered Cable NOMINAL TENSION BENDING RADIUS DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) RISER FIBER COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000 FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM KR ## (16.9) 169 (252) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 10.0 (25.3) 6.7 (16.9) KR ## (16.9) 178 (265) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 10.0 (25.3) 6.7 (16.9) KR ## (16.9) 187 (278) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 10.0 (25.3) 6.7 (16.9) KR ## (19.2) 197 (293) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 11.3 (28.8) 7.6 (19.2) KR ## (20.7) 233 (346) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 12.2 (31.0) 8.1 (20.7) Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. # Outer Jacket Color Replace hashtag (#) in AFL number with number in the Cable Jacket Color table below. Cable Jacket Color Options 1 - Blue 8 - Black 2 - Orange 9 - Yellow 3 - Green A - Violet 4 - Brown B - Rose 5 - Slate C - Aqua 6 - White K - Erika Violet (RAL 4003) 7 - Red Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM REEL F REEL G Reel Height (inches) Reel Outside Width (inches) Drum Diameter (inches) Reel Weight (lbs) CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 18 Fibers 2,300 (7,546) 2,500 / (8,200) 24 Fibers 2,300 (7,546) 2,500 / (8,200) 36 Fibers 1,600 (5,250) 2,500 / (8,200) 48 Fibers 1,500 (4,921) 60 Fibers 1,250 (4,100) 1,500 / (4,921) 72 Fibers 1,000 (3,280) 1,500 / (4,921) or (800) A 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

13 Fiber Optic Cable Armored Tight Buffered Circular Premise Cable Armored Tight Buffered CPC Cables incorporate 4 to 144 fiber count CPC cables in a jacketed, aluminum interlocking armor. Jacketed aluminum interlocking armor provides the best balance of ruggedness, flexibility, and low weight. Flame rated armored cables with no outer jacket and flame rated armored cables with steel interlocking armor are also available. Interlocking armor can also be used with other types of trunk cables, including Indoor/Outdoor Distribution, Breakout and Premise MicroCore. Applications Routing inside of buildings where additional ruggedness is required or where increased rodent resistance is required Extra protection for fiber optic cables in harsh industrial environments Manufacturing plants High-density routings in data center application Cable Components High Fiber Count Circular Premise Cable Circular Premise Cable Fiber Specifications OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

14 Fiber Optic Cable Armored Tight Buffered Circular Premise Cable Mechanical Data RISER PLENUM FIBER COUNT NOMINAL DIAMETER INCHES (MM) WEIGHT TENSION RISER PLENUM RISER PLENUM INSTALLATION LONG LONG INSTALLATION TERM TERM LBS/1000 FT (KG/KM) LBS/1000 FT (KG/KM) LBS (N) LBS (N) LBS (N) LBS (N) INCHES (CM) BENDING RADIUS INSTALLATION LONG TERM UR AIAR UP AIAP (11.8) 79 (117) 89 (132) 150 (660) 45 (198) 100 (440) 30 (132) 7.0 (17.7) 5.0 (12.7) CR AIAR CP AIAP (11.8) 74 (109) 82 (122) 150 (660) 45 (198) 100 (440) 30 (132) 7.0 (17.7) 4.8 (12.2) CR AIAR CP AIAP (13.0) 79 (117) 89 (132) 150 (660) 45 (198) 100 (440) 30 (132) 7.0 (17.7) 5.0 (12.7) CR AIAR CP AIAP (15.7) 129 (193) 144 (215) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 9.3 (23.6) 5.3 (13.4) CR AIAR CP AIAP (21.3) 247 (367) 273 (407) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 7.9 (20.0) 5.2 (13.3) CR AIAR CP AIAP (24) 256 (395) 294 (439) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 14.2 (36.0) 9.4 (24.0) CR AIAR CP AIAP (24) 256 (395) 294 (439) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 14.2 (36.0) 9.4 (24.0) CR AIAR CP AIAP (27.9) 355 (530) 401 (597) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 16.5 (41.9) 11.0 (27.9) CR AIAR CP AIAP (30.7) 472 (705) 507 (755) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 18.1 (46.1) 12.1 (30.7) CR AIAR CP AIAP (34.8) 498 (742) 534 (796) 300 (1320) 90 (396) 150 (660) 45 (198) 19.8 (50.3) 13.2 (33.5) Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. INCHES (CM) Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM REEL F REEL G Reel Height (inches) Reel Outside Width (inches) Drum Diameter (inches) Reel Weight (lbs) CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 4 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 2,600 (8,530) 5,000 (16,404) 6 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 2,600 (8,530) 5,000 (16,404) 8 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 2,600 (8,530) 5,000 (16,404) 12 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 2,250 (7,382) 4,800 (15,748) 18 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 1,700 (5,577) 3,600 (11,811) 24 Fiber w/interlocking Armor 1,500 (4,921) 3,200 (10,500) Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE PLENUM RISER INSTALLATION 0ºC to +70ºC -10ºC to +70ºC OPERATING 0ºC to +70ºC -10ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC -40ºC to +75ºC or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

15 Fiber Optic Cable Copper/Fiber Composite Cable Rugged easy to use composite cable consisting of flexible stranded Copper conductors and integrating communications links utilizing fiber optic technologies. The breakout design provides additional protection for both the copper and fiber channels by individually protecting each with insulated jackets and all-dielectric strength members. For applications requiring remote low-voltage power and high-speed communications, these designs provide an efficient single-installation option where space is of a premium and devices are not easily accessed. Applications Remote application of Low-Voltage power Security networks IP enable appliances Wireless Access Points Standards Telcordia GR-409-CORE ICEA S MSHA approved Features Rugged Riser rated constructions Water-blocked Flexible stranded Copper (12 AWG, 14 AWG, 16 AWG, 18 AWG available) High-speed fiber optics UL 13, UL1666 rated NEC 725 classified CL2R-OF classified 4 Fiber Cable Components 12 Fiber round with core wrap aramid strength Fiber Specifications OVERFILL LAUNCH MAXIMUM ATTENUATION MIN. GIGABIT ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT CORE SIZE/ (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH EMBc MIN. LINK DISTANCE ETHERNET MIN. LINK FIBER TYPE ISO/ (MHZ KM) (MHZ KM) (METERS) DISTANCE (METERS) IEC 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5 Giga-Link 300 OM N/A N/A (5) 50 Giga-Link 600 OM N/A N/A (A) 50 Laser-Link 150 OM N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link 300 OM N/A (C) 50 Laser-Link 550 OM N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 N/A 10,000 (9) SM OS2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5,000 N/A 10,000 Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -20ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +70ºC or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

16 Fiber Optic Cable Copper/Fiber Composite Cable Mechanical Data FIBER COUNT NOMINAL DIAMETER WEIGHT TENSION LBS (N) BENDING RADIUS INCHES (CM) INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM BR004X301#0C-xFF /ycc 4.39 (9.9) 63 (93) 300 (1334) 90 (400) 5.7 (14.5) 3.8 (9.7) BR006X301#0C-xFF /ycc 6.46 (11.7) 87 ( 130) 300 (1334) 90 (400) 6.75 (17.2) 4.5 (11.4) BR008X301#0C-xFF /ycc 8.54 (13.6) 120 (178) 300 (1334) 90 (400) 7.95 (20) 5.3 (13.5) BR012X301#0C-xFF /ycc (15.1) 200 (298) 300 (1334) 90 (400) 9.45 (24) 6.3 (16) Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. # Outer Jacket Color Replace hashtag (#) in AFL number with number in the Cable Jacket Color table below. Cable Jacket Color Options 1 - Blue 8 - Black 2 - Orange 9 - Yellow 3 - Green A - Violet 4 - Brown B - Rose 5 - Slate C - Aqua 6 - White K - Erika Violet (RAL 4003) 7 - Red Cable Length - Reel Size ITEM REEL F Reel Height (inches) 42 Reel Outside Width (inches) 36 Drum Diameter (inches) 23 Reel Weight (lbs) 148 CAPACITY: METERS (FEET) 4 Fiber Breakout 1,500 / (5,000) 6 Fiber Breakout 1,500 / (5,000) 8 Fiber Breakout 1,500 / (5,000) 12 Fiber Breakout 1,500 / (5,000) or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

17 Fiber Optic Cable Tactical Tight Buffered Cable AFL Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. Designed to be deployed and retrieved in the field, AFL s Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repeated impacts crushing forces, abrasion and extreme temperatures. Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -46ºC to +85ºC OPERATING -46ºC to +85ºC STORAGE -55ºC to +85ºC Features Cut resistant polyurethane jacket with flame retardant options available Highly flexible construction allows for multiple deployments All aramid strength members Performance in wide temperature range High impact and crush resistance Durable in high traffic areas MIL-PRF qualified fiber available (-RH designation) Tested to meet MIL-PRF Cable Components Applications Field deployment in abusive environments Temporary installation of critical communications lines where quick retrieval and re-use is necessary High Traffic areas Security and Sensing applications Broadcast deployments Installations in harsh environments Polyurethane outer jacket aramid strength member 250 µm or 500 µm optical fiber 900 µm Elastomeric Tight Buffer Specifications CHARACTERISTIC TEST PROCEDURE PERFORMANCE Tensile and elongation EIA/TIA Operating tensile strength EIA/TIA Low-temp flexibility EIA/TIA Cyclic flexing EIA/TIA Crush resistance EIA/TIA N/cm or greater Impact EIA/TIA Temperature cycling EIA/TIA C to 85 C Temperature/humidity cycling EIA/TIA Method B Life aging EIA/TIA Freezing water immersion EIA/TIA or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

18 Fiber Optic Cable Tactical Tight Buffered Cable Mechanical Data FIBER COUNT NOMINAL DIA. NOMINAL WT. MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD LBS (N) MINIMUM BEND RADIUS INCHES (CM) INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM X%001*30180H (3.0) 5.4 (8) 135 (600) 40 (178) 1.8 (4.5) 1.2 (3.0) X%001*40180H (4.0) 9.1 (13.5) 180 (800) 54 (240) 2.4 (6.0) 1.6 (4.0) X%001*46180H (4.6) 12.2 (18.1) 180 (800) 54 (240) 2.7 (6.9) 1.8 (4.6) X%002*55180H (5.5) 16.2 (25) 400 (1780) 130 (578) 2.2 (5.5) 1.1 (2.8) X%004*55180H (5.5) 16.2 (25) 400 (1780) 130 (578) 2.2 (5.5) 1.1 (2.8) X%002*58180H (5.8) 21.5 (32) 400 (1780) 130 (578) 3.4 (8.7) 2.3 (5.8) X%004*58180H (5.8) 21.5 (32) 400 (1780) 130 (578) 3.4 (8.7) 2.3 (5.8) X%006*61180H (6.1) 22.2 (33) 400 (1780) 130 (578) 3.6 (9.2) 2.4 (6.1) X%008*64180H (6.4) 28.8 (44) 470 (2090) 160 (712) 2.5 (6.4) 1.3 (3.2) X%012*64180H (6.4) 30.8 (47) 470 (2090) 160 (712) 2.5 (6.4) 1.3 (3.2) X%024*85180H (8.5) 38.7 (59) 670 (2980) 220 (979) 3.3 (8.5) 1.7 (4.3) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Replace percent (%) in AFL number with corresponding jacket type below. 1 = Tactical Polyurethane 2 = Flame Retardant Polyurethane 3 = LSZH Polyurethane 4= StrataJac Tactical+ Encapsulation Replace asterisk (*) in AFL number with corresponding fiber type below. 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link = Single-mode K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive L = 50/125 µm OM3 C = 50/125 µm OM4 500 µm primary coated fiber available. Customer specified print available. See ordering guide for PN designations. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

19 Fiber Optic Cable AlumaCore OPGW AlumaCore Optical Ground Wire is preferred for its performance under the most rugged conditions. Its central aluminum pipe provides superb fiber protection making it ideal for everything from basic installations to those applications requiring high tensions or for extremely long spans. Temperature Range Operating -40ºC to +85ºC Storage -50ºC to +85ºC Installation -30ºC to +85ºC Features Fiber counts up to 144 Optical unit provides exceptional mechanical and thermal protection for fibers Thick-walled aluminum pipe provides hermetic seal for optical units, excellent crush resistance and low resistivity Stranded wires selected to optimize mechanical and electrical properties Dielectric optical units are available with 6, 8, 12, 18 and 24 fibers Supplied with up to 6 optical units, depending on fiber count Cable Components aluminum clad steel wire aluminum alloy wire aluminum pipe optical unit aluminum cla aluminum allo aluminum pip stainless steel optical fibers Typical Designs FAULT TOTAL CONDUCTOR OVERALL aluminum clad steel wire MAX SHIP LENGTH FIBERS OPGW CURRENT AREA DIAMETER WEIGHT RBS SAG10 (per reel type) (max) SIZE aluminum alloy CHART wire # (ka)²sec in² mm² in mm lbs/ft kg/m lbs kgf Wood (m) Steel (m) 12 AC-57/ ,214 shaped aluminum core 7, ,000 7, AC-29/29/ ,344 helically wrapped 4, aluminum tape 7,000 7, AC-72/ ,329 9, ,500 7, AC-32/40/ ,732 optical unit 6, ,000 7, AC-64/ ,391 8, ,700 7, AC-29/34/ ,351 5, ,000 7, AC-74/ ,132 9, ,000 7, AC-37/37/ ,556 6, ,000 7, AC-71/ ,546 9, ,900 7, AC-33/38/ ,779 6, ,000 7, AC-86/ ,829 11, ,000 6, AC-40/47/ ,646 7, ,500 7, AC-86/ ,098 11, ,700 6, AC-34/52/ ,053 8, ,800 7, AC-129/ ,034 15, ,400 4, AC-65/65/ ,524 10, ,500 5, AC-88/ ,556 11, ,700 6, AC-38/49/ ,698 8, ,800 6, AC-102/ ,555 13, ,100 5, AC-44/58/ ,566 9, ,200 6, AC-82/ ,069 10, ,800 6, AC-39/43/ ,145 7, ,100 6, AC-125/ ,882 15, ,500 4, AC-58/67/ ,286 10, ,500 6,100 aluminum allo aluminum cla stainless steel with optical fi This information denotes the input data needed for Sag10 (sag and tension calculation) software. WIR files of all these catalog designs can be found on PLS-CADD web page. NOTE: The designs above are only a sampling of the options available from AFL. Contact customer service for a cable designed to your exact specifications. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

20 Fiber Optic Cable CentraCore OPGW CentraCore Optical Ground Wire is available in fiber counts up to 96, and due to its small size, offers a unique solution to the diameter and weight concerns on many of today s overloaded towers. A central stainless steel tube houses the optical fibers. The stainless steel tube is then inserted into an aluminum pipe which provides added crush protection while increasing the conductivity. The fibers are protected from environmental conditions (lightning, short circuit, loading) to ensure reliability and longevity. Temperature Range Operating - 40ºC to + 85ºC Storage - 50ºC to + 85ºC Installation - 30ºC to + 85ºC Typical Designs Features Fiber counts up to 96 Very small diameter, low weight Laser-welded, hermetically sealed stainless steel tubes provide mechanical and thermal protection for optical fibers Central tube provides mechanical and thermal protection for optical fibers Excellent crush resistance and high fault current rating capability Unique designs have maximum allowable tension to control fiber strain Stranded wires selected to optimize mechanical and electrical properties of cable Cable Components aluminum clad steel wire aluminum alloy wire aluminum pipe stainless steel tube optical fibers FIBERS (max) OPGW SIZE FAULT CURRENT TOTAL CONDUCTOR AREA OVERALL DIAMETER WEIGHT RBS SAG10 CHART # MAX SHIP LENGTH (per reel type) (ka)²sec in² mm² in mm lbs/ft kg/m lbs kgf Wood (m) Steel (m) 48 CC-57/ ,626 7, CC-29/29/ ,755 4, CC-54/ ,089 7, CC-27/27/ ,523 4, CC-72/ ,740 9, CC-32/40/ ,144 6, CC-75/ ,845 9, CC-38/38/ ,106 6, CC-54/ ,067 7, CC-27/27/ ,501 4, CC-63/ ,677 8, CC-32/32/ ,195 5, CC-75/ ,831 9, CC-38/38/ ,092 6, CC-65/ ,194 8, CC-30/36/ ,104 5, CC-75/ ,953 9, CC-38/38/ ,214 6, CC-86/ ,879 11, CC-34/51/ ,768 8, This information denotes the input data needed for Sag10 (sag and tension calculation) software. WIR files of all these catalog designs can be found on PLS-CADD web page. NOTE: The designs above are only a sampling of the options available from AFL. Contact customer service for a cable designed to your exact specifications. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

21 Fiber Optic Cable HexaCore OPGW HexaCore Optical Ground Wire cable houses and protects the optical fibers within gelfilled stainless steel tubes. Aluminum clad steel and aluminum alloy wires are stranded with the tubes to create a dual-layer design suitable for a variety of applications. Temperature Range Operating - 40ºC to + 85ºC Storage - 50ºC to + 85ºC Installation - 30ºC to + 85ºC Features Fiber counts up to 432 or higher for custom designs Laser-welded, hermetically sealed stainless steel tubes provide mechanical and thermal protection for optical fibers High load, long span capability Anti-rotational devices usually not required for installation Each stainless steel tube is uniquely identified for organization at splice locations Stranded wires selected to optimize mechanical and electrical properties of cable Cable Components aluminum alloy wire aluminum clad steel wire stainless steel tube with optical fibers Typical Designs FIBERS FAULT TOTAL CONDUCTOR MAX SHIP LENGTH OPGW CURRENT AREA OVERALL DIAMETER WEIGHT RBS SAG10 (per reel type) SIZE CHART # (max) (ka)²sec in² mm² in mm lbs/ft kg/m lbs kgf Wood (m) Steel (m) 24 SX-32/45/ SX-41/32/ SX-75/37/ SX-90/30/ S1-82/52/ ,042 9, S1-83/59/ ,131 10, S1-91/61/ ,302 10, S1-71/52/ ,791 8, S1-73/59/ ,880 9, S1-81/61/ ,051 10, S1-41/52/ ,038 8, S1-42/59/ ,128 9, S1-50/61/ ,299 10, This information denotes the input data needed for Sag10 (sag and tension calculation) software. WIR files of all these catalog designs can be found on PLS-CADD web page. NOTE: The designs above are only a sampling of the options available from AFL. Contact customer service for a cable designed to your exact specifications. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

22 Fiber Optic Cable Aerial Drop Cable Aerial Drop Cable is specifically designed for Fiber-to-the-Subscriber applications. It is a round, all dielectric cable ideally suited for self-supporting drop-type installations as well as in lashed or conduit builds. 6-Fiber Design Typical Spans with 2.0% Installation Sag: NESC Heavy 100 ft (30 meters) NESC Medium 185 ft (56 meters) NESC Light 370 ft (113 meters) Temperature Range Operating: -40ºC to + 70ºC Storage: -50ºC to + 70ºC Installation: -30ºC to + 70ºC Features Designed for use with inexpensive attachment hardware Compatible with standard splice closures Self-supporting - no messenger needed Small cross section for maximum density in closures and conduit Mechanical Data 12-Fiber Design Typical Spans with 2.0% Installation Sag: NESC Heavy 75 ft (23 meters) NESC Medium 140 ft (43 meters) NESC Light 260 ft (75 meters) Note: Typical installations should not be more than 4-6 spans. Point-to-point distance should not exceed 400 ft. Cable Components polyethylene outer jacket gel-filled buffer tube optical fibers strength elements water-blocking system MAXIMUM LENGTHS* NOMINAL DIAMETER NOMINAL WEIGHT FIBER SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE COUNT INCHES MM LBS/1000 FT KG/KM FEET METERS FEET METERS ,800 10,000 26,250 8, ,500 8,400 26,250 8,000 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. Installation Information FIBER MAXIMUM LOADING OPERATING TENSION MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS (DYNAMIC) MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS (STATIC) COUNT LBS N INCHES CM INCHES CM NOTE: AFL recommends coiling a minimum of 12 feet (3.6 meters) into 6 inch (0.15 meters) loops at the entrance to all splice closures. FIBER FIBER TYPE COUNT 1-6 AE AA9 62.5/125 Giga-Link AE0126C110AC1 1-6 AE AA9 50/125 Giga-Link AE0125C110AC1 1-6 AE AA9 Single-mode 7-12 AE0129C110AC1 MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) BANDWIDTH (MHZ KM) 850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

23 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable AFL Mini-Span All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (ADSS) cable is designed for outside plant aerial and duct applications in local and campus network loop architectures. From poleto-build to town-town installations, the Mini-Span cabling system, which includes cables, suspension, dead end and termination enclosures, offers a comprehensive transmission circuit infrastructure with proven, high-reliability performance. See AFL s Fiber Optic Cable Hardware catalog for more information. As the ADSS cabling concept implies, a separate messenger support wire hanging system is not required, greatly reducing installation time and improving upfront and maintenance labor costs. Temperature Range Operating: -40ºC to +70ºC Storage: -50ºC to +70ºC Installation: -30ºC to +70ºC Mini-Span includes fiber counts up to 144 optical fibers and any type or combination of single-mode and laser-optimized multimode fibers with the cable. Pole-to-Pole span lengths range from 50 feet to over 1000 feet. Installation Information NESC SPANS (@ 1.5% INITIAL SAG) FEET (METERS) MAX. SAGGING TENSION MAX. LOADING OPERATING TENSION MIN. BENDING RADIUS (DYNAMIC) MIN. BENDING RADIUS (STATIC) CABLE LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY LBS N LBS N INCHES CM INCHES CM Mini-Span (152) 300 (91) 175 (53) Mini-Span (137) 300 (91) 180 (55) , NESC SPANS (@ 1% INITIAL SAG) FEET (METERS) MAX. SAGGING TENSION MAX. LOADING OPERATING TENSION MIN. BENDING RADIUS (DYNAMIC) MIN. BENDING RADIUS (STATIC) CABLE LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY LBS N LBS N INCHES CM INCHES CM Mini-Span (183) 440 (134) 275 (84) Mini-Span (320) 850 (259) 575 (175) 1,306 5,809 1,783 7, Mini-Span (229) 600 (183) 500 (152) 1,411 6,278 1,856 8, Optical Information MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (db/km) MULTIMODE *62.5/125 µm MULTIMODE 50/125 µm SINGLE-MODE CABLE (1310 nm/1550 nm) (850 nm/1300 nm) (850 nm/1300 nm) Mini-Span / / /1.2 Mini-Span 383 Mini-Span 424 Mini-Span 535 Mini-Span / / /0.9 SINGLE-MODE (1310 nm/1550 nm) BANDWIDTH (MHz km) MULTIMODE *62.5/125 µm (850 nm/1300 nm) MULTIMODE 50/125 µm (850 nm/1300 nm) n/a 200/ /500 * All 62.5/125 µm multimode ADSS cable transmission performances meet or exceed FDDI requirements. Premium transmission performance fibers available on request. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

24 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable Mechanical Data NOMINAL NOMINAL MAXIMUM LENGTHS* FIBER DIAMETER WEIGHT SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE CABLE COUNT INCHES MM LBS/1000 KG/KM FEET METERS FEET METERS Mini-Span ,800 10,000 26,250 8,000 Mini-Span ,800 10,000 26,250 8,000 Mini-Span ,800 10,000 26,250 8,000 Mini-Span ,800 10,000 26,250 8,000 Mini-Span ,000 7,000 23,000 7,000 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. CABLE Mini-Span 323 Mini-Span 383 Mini-Span 424 Mini-Span 535 Mini-Span 693 FIBER FIBERS NUMBER OF COUNT PER TUBE TUBES / FIBERS SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE 62.5/125 MULTIMODE 50/ w/6 AE AA1 AE AA1 AE AA w/6 AE AA1 AE AA1 AE AA w/6 AE AA1 AE AA1 AE AA w/6 AE AA1 AE AA1 AE AA w/6 (3 fillers) AE0069C420AA0 AE0066C420AA0 AE0065C420AA w/12 (3 fillers) AE0129C420AA0 AE0126C420AA0 AE0125C420AA w/12, 1 w/6 (2 fillers) AE0189C420AA0 AE0186C420AA0 AE0185C420AA w/12 (2 fillers) AE0249C420AA0 AE0246C420AA0 AE0245C420AA w/12, 1 w/6 (1 filler) AE0309C420AA0 AE0306C420AA0 AE0305C420AA w/12 (1 filler) AE0369C420AA0 AE0366C420AA0 AE0365C420AA w/12 AE0489C420AA0 AE0486C420AA0 AE0485C420AA w/6 (4 fillers) AE0069C520AA4 AE0066C520AA4 AE0065C520AA w/12 (4 fillers) AE0129C520AA4 AE0126C520AA4 AE0125C520AA w/12, 1 w/6 (3 fillers) AE0189C520AA4 AE0186C520AA4 AE0185C520AA w/12 (3 fillers) AE0249C520AA4 AE0246C520AA4 AE0245C520AA w/12, 1 w/6 (2 fillers) AE0309C520AA4 AE0306C520AA4 AE0305C520AA w/12 (2 fillers) AE0369C520AA4 AE0366C520AA4 AE0365C520AA w/12 (1 filler) AE0489C520AA4 AE0486C520AA4 AE0485C520AA w/12 (no fillers) AE0609C520AA4 AE0606C520AA4 AE0605C520AA w/6 (7 fillers) AE0069C820EA7 AE0066C820EA7 AE0065C820EA w/12 (7 fillers) AE0129C820EA7 AE0126C820EA7 AE0125C820EA w/12, 1 w/6 (6 fillers) AE0189C820EA7 AE0186C820EA7 AE0185C820EA w/12 (6 fillers) AE0249C820EA7 AE0246C820EA7 AE0245C820EA w/12, 1 w/6 (5 fillers) AE0309C820EA7 AE0306C820EA7 AE0305C820EA w/12 (5 fillers) AE0369C820EA7 AE0366C820EA7 AE0365C820EA w/12 (4 fillers) AE0489C820EA7 AE0486C820EA7 AE0485C820EA w/12 (3 fillers) AE0609C820EA7 AE0606C820EA7 AE0605C820EA w/12 (2 fillers) AE0729C820EA7 AE0726C820EA7 AE0725C820EA w/12 (1 filler) AE0849C820EA7 AE0846C820EA7 AE0845C820EA w/12 (no fillers) AE0969C820EA7 AE0966C820EA7 AE0965C820EA w/12 (11 fillers) AE0129CC20EA0 AE0126CC20EA0 AE0125CC20EA w/12 (10 fillers) AE0249CC20EA0 AE0246CC20EA0 AE0245CC20EA w/12 (9 fillers) AE0369CC20EA0 AE0366CC20EA0 AE0365CC20EA w/12 (8 fillers) AE0489CC20EA0 AE0486CC20EA0 AE0485CC20EA w/12 (7 fillers) AE0609CC20EA0 AE0606CC20EA0 AE0605CC20EA w/12 (6 fillers) AE0729CC20EA0 AE0726CC20EA0 AE0725CC20EA w/12 (5 fillers) AE0849CC20EA0 AE0846CC20EA0 AE0845CC20EA w/12 (4 fillers) AE0969CC20EA0 AE0966CC20EA0 AE0965CC20EA w/12 (3 fillers) AE1089CC20EA0 AE1086CC20EA0 AE1085CC20EA w/12 (2 fillers) AE1209CC20EA0 AE1206CC20EA0 AE1205CC20EA w/12 (1 filler) AE1329CC20EA0 AE1326CC20EA0 AE1325CC20EA w/12 (no fillers) AE1449CC20EA0 AE1446CC20EA0 AE1445CC20EA0 Contact customer service for price and availability. Non-zero dispersion-shifted fibers are also available. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

25 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable Sag and Tension Information CABLE MINI-SPAN 323 MINI-SPAN 383 INITIAL INITIAL NESC LIGHT LOADING NESC MEDIUM LOADING NESC HEAVY LOADING SPAN SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION FEET METERS % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,750 Typical Cable Components 4 Position 323 or 383 polyethylene outer jacket tape torque balanced aramid ripcord FRP central member gel-filled loose buffer tube with optical fibers water-blocking system or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

26 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable Sag and Tension Information CABLE MINI-SPAN 424 INITIAL INITIAL NESC LIGHT LOADING NESC MEDIUM LOADING NESC HEAVY LOADING SPAN SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION FEET METERS % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,078 Typical Cable Components 5 Position 424 polyethylene outer jacket tape torque balanced aramid ripcord FRP central member gel-filled loose buffer tube with optical fibers water-blocking system or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

27 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable Sag and Tension Information CABLE MINI-SPAN 535 MINI-SPAN 693 INITIAL INITIAL NESC LIGHT LOADING NESC MEDIUM LOADING NESC HEAVY LOADING SPAN SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION SAG TENSION FEET METERS % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N % LBS N , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,082 4, , , , ,210 5, , , , ,334 5, , , ,076 4, ,454 6, , , ,166 5, ,571 6, , ,045 4, ,255 5, ,685 7, , ,083 4, ,299 5, ,741 7, , ,121 4, ,342 5, , ,196 5, ,428 6, , ,270 5, ,513 6, , ,344 5, ,597 7, , ,417 6, ,679 7, ,057 4, ,489 6, ,761 7, ,119 4, ,561 6, ,181 5, ,633 7,263 1, ,243 5, ,704 7,579 1, ,306 5, ,775 7, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,097 4, , , , ,257 5, , , ,081 4, ,411 6, , ,059 4, ,202 5, ,560 6, , ,168 5, ,321 5, ,705 7, , ,275 5, ,437 6, ,847 8, ,035 4, ,381 6, ,552 6, ,129 5, ,486 6, ,665 7, ,223 5, ,591 7, ,317 5, ,694 7, ,411 6, ,797 7,996 Typical Cable Components 8 Position Position 693 polyethylene outer jacket tape torque balanced aramid ripcord FRP central member gel-filled loose buffer tube with optical fibers water-blocking system or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

28 Fiber Optic Cable Mini-Span ADSS Cable Reel Information REEL SPECS REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight with Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 320 kg 950 lbs 431 kg MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH (feet/meters) Mini-Span ,256 ft 4,650 m 32,800 ft 10,000 m Mini-Span ,827 ft 3,300 m 25,202 ft 7,700 m 32,800 ft 10,000 m Mini-Span 424 8,850 ft 2,700 m 20,250 ft 6,200 m 26,250 ft 8,000 m 32,800 ft 10,000 m Mini-Span 484 6,500 ft 2,000 m 15,750 ft 4,800 m 21,000 ft 6,450 m 32,800 ft 10,000 m Mini-Span 535 5,500 ft 1,675 m 12,800 ft 3,900 m 17,225 ft 5,250 m 26,000 ft 6,920 m 32,800 ft 10,000 m Mini-Span 693 9,300 ft 2,835 m 12,500 ft 3,810 m 16,330 ft 4,975 m 23,000 ft 7,000 m AFL provides ADSS cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available on request. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

29 Fiber Optic Cable All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable AFL-ADSS (All-Dielectric Self-Supporting) cable is ideal for installation in distribution as well as transmission environments, even when live-line installations are required. As its name indicates, there is no support or messenger wire required, so installation is achieved in a single pass, making ADSS an economical and simple means of achieving a fiber optic network. AFL manufactures its own line of attachment hardware as well as supplies formed wire fittings when preferred. Features Suitable for use on distribution and high voltage transmission lines Track-resistant outer jacket available for installations on high voltage lines where space potentials reach up to 25 kv Gel-filled buffer tubes are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access Cable is water-blocked using dry core technology, therefore no messy flooding compounds Design details listed below for span lengths up to 1500 ft (457 m) and fiber counts up to 432 Custom designs available for larger span lengths or other fiber counts Temperature Range Operating: -40ºC to +70ºC Storage: -50ºC to +70ºC Installation: -30ºC to +70ºC Cable Components Typical Maximum Lengths REEL CAPACITY CABLE DIAMETER FEET METERS < 0.85" (21.6 mm) 23,000 7,000 > 0.85" (21.6 mm) 10,000 3,000 NOTE: Longer lengths may be available upon request. Lengths shown may require non-standard reel sizes/types. polyethylene or track resistant outer jacket polyethylene inner jacket non-hygroscopic core wrap torque-balanced aramid yarns non-hygroscopic core wrap ripcords gel-filled loose buffer tube (4-24 optical fibers / tube) FRP central member water-blocking binder Quote Request Information A - XXX - XXXX - X - X - X - X Fiber Count 002 = 2 fibers 432 = 432 fibers Span Length 0100 = =1500 Unit of Measure F =Feet M =Meters NESC Loading Condition L =Light M =Medium H =Heavy Line Voltage A= Less than 115 kv B = 115 kv Fiber Code 6 =62.5/125 GIGA-Link =62.5/125 GIGA-Link =50/125 GIGA-Link =50/125 GIGA-Link 2000 L =50 Laser-Link =Single-mode Q =Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive NOTE: The designs listed are only a sampling of the options available from AFL. Contact customer service for a cable designed to your exact specifications. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

30 Fiber Optic Cable All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable Optical Information MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (db/km) OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH (MHz km) GIGABIT ETHERNET MINIMUM LINK DISTANCE (meters) FIBER TYPE 850 nm 1300 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 850 nm 1300 nm 850 nm 1300 nm (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (8) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (7) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (L) 50 Laser-Link N/A N/A (9) Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 (Q) Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode N/A N/A N/A 0.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A (K) SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on bandwidth /modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget. Reel Information REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight with Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 311 kg 950 lbs 431 kg AFL provides ADSS cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

31 Fiber Optic Cable L I G H T All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC LIGHT 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 12 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

32 Fiber Optic Cable L I G H T All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC LIGHT 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 48 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

33 Fiber Optic Cable L I G H T All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC LIGHT 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 84 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

34 Fiber Optic Cable L I G H T All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC LIGHT 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 120 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

35 Fiber Optic Cable L I G H T All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC LIGHT 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 216 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

36 Fiber Optic Cable M E D I U M All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC MEDIUM 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 12 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

37 Fiber Optic Cable All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable M E D I U M NESC MEDIUM 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 48 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

38 Fiber Optic Cable M E D I U M All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC MEDIUM 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 84 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

39 Fiber Optic Cable M E D I U M All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC MEDIUM 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 120 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

40 Fiber Optic Cable M E D I U M All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC MEDIUM 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 216 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

41 Fiber Optic Cable H E A V Y All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC HEAVY 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 12 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

42 Fiber Optic Cable H E A V Y All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC HEAVY 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 48 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

43 Fiber Optic Cable H E A V Y All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC HEAVY 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 84 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

44 Fiber Optic Cable H E A V Y All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC HEAVY 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 120 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

45 Fiber Optic Cable H E A V Y All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (AFL-ADSS ) Fiber Optic Cable NESC HEAVY 1% INSTALLATION SAG SPAN WEIGHT DIAMETER MRCL INITIAL TENSION UNLOADED LOADED FEET METERS LBS/FT KG/KM INCHES MM LBS N LBS N SAG % LBS N 216 FIBERS FIBERS FIBERS * Initial tension indicates tension before 10 year creep. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

46 Fiber Optic Cable SkyWrap Successfully installed worldwide since 1982, SkyWrap is a fiber optic cable helically applied on ground wires or phase conductors. A specially designed spinning machine is used to wrap the cable under controlled conditions. This system offers a complete communication link designed and engineered for high-voltage environments at low cost. SkyWrap is the ideal solution when access to the overhead line is problematic due to environment or terrain. The installation equipment is lightweight, easy to handle and quick to install. When power outages are hard to coordinate SkyWrap can be installed on ground wire while the phase conductors remain live, or on phase conductors with single circuit outage. Temperature Range Operating: -40 C to +85 C Store: -40 C to +50 C Installation: -20 C to +50 C Benefits Quick, cost effective installation Utilize existing power line infrastructure Use where access is limited (e.g. mountains and river crossings) Use for both ground wires and phase conductors Live line installations on ground wire or single circuit outage on phase Complete lifetime turn-key solutions Over 30 years installation experience Cable Components Outer Jacket Buffer Tube Fiber Strength Members Flooding Compound Cable Features Designed for ground wires or phase conductors Zero fiber strain under all service conditions Up to 96 fibers per cable with 4 gel-filled tubes Double SkyWrap installations provides 192 fiber capacity SkyWrap can be installed on OPGW to increase existing fiber count Shotgun (birdshot) resistant jacket designs for tougher environments Small size and low weight ensures minimum loads on overhead lines All-dielectric construction provides immunity from electromagnetic interference Complies with IEEE specification or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

47 Fiber Optic Cable SkyWrap Part Number Fiber Count Cable Type # Tubes Fiber type SW n CA 4 * up to 96 CA = Standard Ground HA = Standard Phase Only 4 buffer tube designs 5 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link 2000 JM = Birdshot Ground are available at 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link 300 HM = Birdshot Phase this time 8 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link 1000 L = 50/125µm multimode Laser-Link = Single-mode SkyWrap - Technical Figures as of 11 June 2014 ITEM NUMBER STANDARD GROUND WIRE FIBER COUNT CABLE O.D. INCHES (mm) WEIGHT LBS/MILE (kg/km) LENGTH PER REEL FEET (m) CASSETTE LENGTH FEET (m) SW-nCA (6.4) 128 (36) 8,005 (2,440) 16,010 (4,880) SW-nCA (6.6) 138 (39) 7,530 (2,295) 15,059 (4,590) SW-nCA (8.0) 209 (59) 5,125 (1,562) 10,249 (3,124) BIRDSHOT RESISTANT GROUND WIRE SW-nJM (7.3) 163 (46) 5,991 (1,826) 11,982 (3,652) SW-nJM (7.5) 177 (50) 5,676 (1,730) 11,352 (3,460) SW-nJM (8.9) 252 (71) 4,029 (1,228) 8,058 (2,456) STANDARD PHASE CONDUCTOR SW-nHA (7.3) 195 (55) 6,280 (1,914) 12,559 (3,828) SW-nHA (7.5) 209 (59) 5,948 (1,813) 11,896 (3,626) SW-nHA (8.9) 291 (82) 4,226 (1,288) 8,451 (2,576) BIRDSHOT RESISTANT PHASE CONDUCTOR SW-nHM (8.0) 216 (61) 5,230 (1,594) 10,459 (3,188) SW-nHM (8.2) 231 (65) 4,977 (1,517) 9,954 (3,034) SW-nHM (9.6) 316 (89) 3,632 (1,107) 7,264 (2,214) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Installation equipment information PARAMETER VALUE Typical Weight (includes cable and balance weight) 550 lbs (250kg) Min-Max Radius of rotation ft ( m) Wrapping Speed 3 miles per hour (5km per hour) Installation Hardware A full range of hardware and accessories are available as part of the SkyWrap solution. Many different options are available to suit individual structure types and environmental conditions. Please contact AFL for more information. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

48 Mini-Bracket Mini Brackets are used for short and medium spans of ADSS fiber optic cable as well as Aerial Drop cables. Mini Brackets are sized to fit specific ADSS diameters. Standard Mini Brackets are employed with fitted bushings to provide a good support/groove fit and to prevent the support from damaging the cable. The bolted supports are supplied with aluminum captive bolts to simplify installation with no loose parts. Mini-Bracket Features Maximum one side angle: 8.5 degrees Estimated weight: 2.9 lbs. (1.3 Kg) Maximum rated strength: 3,000 lbs. Hand tighten bolt to 25 in. lbs. (2.8 N-m) Slip load at 4 to 6% of RBS DESCRIPTION Aerial Drop 256 maximum line angle =17 (150 ft NESC heavy, 275 ft NESC medium, 550 ft NESC light) Aerial Drop 307 maximum line angle =17 (220 ft NESC heavy, 400 ft NESC medium, 675 ft NESC light) ADSS Mini-Span 424 maximum line angle =17 (275 ft NESC heavy, 450 ft NESC medium, 600 ft NESC light) ADSS Mini-Span 484 maximum line angle =17 (275 ft NESC heavy, 400 ft NESC medium, 525 ft NESC light) ADSS Mini-Span 535 maximum line angle =17 (350 ft NESC heavy, 550 ft NESC medium, 675 ft NESC light) AMBB256 AMBB307 AMBB424 AMBB AMBB Mini Formed Wire Tangent Support (FTS) Formed Wire Tangent Supports (FTS) are used with ADSS Mini-Span 323 and Mini-Span 383 for short span applications. Tangent supports provide a method of attaching AFL s smallest ADSS Mini-Span designs with excellent unbalanced load capability and bend relief support. This product is designed to connect directly to J-hooks on wood poles for an economical solution. ATS 321/330 ATS 371/383 DESCRIPTION ADSS Mini-Span 323 maximum line angle = 20 (175 ft NESC heavy, 300 ft NESC medium, 500 ft NESC light) ADSS Mini-Span 383 maximum line angle = 20 (180 ft NESC heavy, 300 ft NESC medium, 450 ft NESC light) ATS321/330 ATS371/ , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

49 Trunnion Assemblies Single and Double Cables AFL offers trunnions with various mounting capabilities: bolted, banded or standoff. Trunnions reduce installation costs by functioning as a pull-through during installation (maximum line angle for stringing is 15 total, 7.5 per side, number of structures not to exceed 30). No block or pulley is needed provided these conditions are met. Single Trunnion Cable Support Double Trunnion Cable Support (closed) Features May be used as a pull-through by removing the bushing inserts Double cable supports option High-strength aluminum Smaller and more compact design Facilitates faster installation Color-coded range taking inserts for easy identification Versatile mounting styles to fit different structure types: bolted, banded or standoff Banding and pole hardware supplied by customer Lowers the total cost of installation Span Length: 600 ft. NESC Heavy 1,200 ft. NESC Light Single Cable Support Double Trunnion Cable Support (open) CABLE O.D. RANGE ESTIMATED WEIGHT INCHES MILLIMETERS LBS KG BUSHING COLOR 0.420" " Black ATGN420/ " " Blue ATGN475/ " " Orange ATGN526/ " " Brown ATGN576/ " " Green ATGN626/ " " White ATGN676/ " " Red ATGN726/ " " Purple ATGN776/ " " Yellow ATGN826/ " " Pink ATGN876/925 Application Notes: 1. For use with ADSS cables with polyethylene jackets only. Not for use on track resistant ADSS cable. 2. As a stringing block: Maximum line angle = 15º (7.5º per side) Maximum number of structures = For final installation: Maximum line angle = 22º (11º per side) continued , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

50 Trunnion Assemblies (cont.) Double Tangent Support BUSHING NUMBER CABLE O.D. RANGE BUSHING COLOR CODE MAXIMUM SPAN CAPABILITIES USING NESC LOADS IN FEET/INCHES ESTIMATED WEIGHT "A" "B" INCHES MM HEAVY LBS KG Black 600/ Blue 600/ Orange 600/ Brown 600/ Green 600/ White 600/ Red 600/ Purple 600/ Yellow 600/ Pink 500/ Blue + White CONTACT AFL Gray CONTACT AFL How to Order Order by assembling part number as shown: OPEN POSITION DATGN Bushing "A" Number A Bushing "B" Number B BANDING SLOT ACCEPTS 1.25" WIDE BANDS (SEE NOTE 2) 3/8-16UNC THREAD Reference table above. See Note 1 below. Example: First cable 0.500" OD Bushing "A" number = 475 Second cable 0.750" OD Bushing "B" number = 726 Order by part number: DATGN475A726B POLE Notes: 1. Bushing "A" and "B" may be the same or different. 2. Stainless steel banding to be supplied by customer. 5/8-11UNC THREAD , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

51 Mini-Dead Ends The Mini-Dead Ends are designed for fast and easy installation of your ADSS Mini-Span cable. The Mini-Dead End is ideal in crowded distribution environments where its shorter length allows for efficient installation. This unique low-cost product is used in typical spans with 1%-2% installation sag. ADESDFW2-256 & 307 Features Easy and quick installation No special tools or hardware required for installation Small, requiring less storage space * ADELD2E-323T & 383T ADELD2E TE shown with optional thimble eye APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION Aerial Drop ft NESC heavy, 275 ft NESC medium, 550 ft NESC light Aerial Drop 307 Short Span (250 lb max. tension) 65 ft NESC heavy, 115 ft NESC medium, 210 ft NESC light Aerial Drop 307 Long Span 220 ft NESC heavy, 400 ft NESC medium, 675 ft NESC light ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 300 ft NESC medium, 500 ft NESC light ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 300 ft NESC medium, 450 ft NESC light ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 450 ft NESC medium, 600 ft NESC light ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 400 ft NESC medium, 525 ft NESC light ADESDFW2-256 ADESDFW2-307 ADELD2E-013TE ADELD2E-323T ADELD2E-383T ADELD2E ADEMS484 NOTE: Part numbers ADEMS484, ADEW10J1-AL535, and ADEW16J1-AL693 attach to structure via common pole hardware sold separately such as thimble eye, ram s head, guy hooks, etc. For spans greater than the span lengths above, contact Customer Service. ADEMS , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

52 Wedge Dead End (to be used only on Standard ADSS Cable up to 0.890" diameter, 144 fibers) ADEW10J1-AL535 AFL offers wedge dead ends that ease and speed ADSS cable installation. The ADSS Wedge Dead End is ideal in crowded distribution environments because its shorter length allows for safer and efficient installation. The Wedge Dead End comes with all parts assembled. The side plates are properly aligned with spacers and self-locking hex bolts, as well as retainers. Lubricated wedges are pre-installed inside the body of the dead end. Caution: The load ratings shown here are based on performance results of certain cable configurations and may not be representative of all manufacturers ADSS cable designs. AFL strongly recommends that before using this product, you contact AFL to obtain the recommended load rating and to verify that the wedge dead end has been qualified for use with the proposed cable. AFL will perform a qualification test at no charge. Specifications ADEW16J1-AL693 Benefits Wedge-type design is safer than spiral wrap style dead ends Fewer parts, smaller and easier to store Attaches to structure via common pole hardware sold separately (thimble eye, ram s head, etc.) Features Easier and faster installation Lower total system costs No special tools or hardware required for installation PARAMETER Wedge Length Cable O.D. Hold Strength Maximum Attenuation Change APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 700 ft NESC medium, 875 ft NESC light Maximum loading capability is 1500 lbs. ADSS Mini-Span ft NESC heavy, 600 ft NESC medium, 750 ft NESC light Maximum loading capability is 1500 lbs. VALUE 10" or 16" depending on cable characteristics 0.512" to 0.890" (13 mm to 22.6 mm) 100% of Maximum Rated Cable Load (MRCL) 0.05 db at 100% MRCL ADEW10J1-AL535 ADEW16J1-AL693 for Double Jacket Cables ADE W 16 J2 AL YYY ADSS Dead End Wedge Type Dead End Length of wedge component 16 = 16 inch type Max. Load Rating = 3000 lbs. ADSS Jacket Type J2 = Double Layer Cable Manufacturer Code AL = AFL Cable Diameter (in Inches) Application Notes: 1. For use with ADSS cables with polyethylene jackets only. Not for use on track resistant ADSS cable. 2. AFL fiber optic cable and related hardware are designed to work as a system. Dead ends may not be available for cable from other manufacturers , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

53 Wood Pole Clamps for OPGW Guide clamps are typically two groove clamps used to guide the cable to splice locations. Clamps are spaced 5 to 8 feet apart to help maintain alignment of the cable down the towers or poles. Not applicable to OGW series. Wood Pole Clamp Features Slip strength: >100 lbs. Wood Pole Clamp (Note: not available with metric hardware; 3/8" x 3" lag bolt included ) DIMENSIONS - IN. (MM) OPGW DIAMETER - IN. (MM) A B WEIGHT - LBS. (KG) ( ) 2.81 (71) 4.25 (108).33 (.15) OGW469/ ( ) 3.50 (89) 5.19 (132).46 (.21) OGW562/ ( ) 3.50 (89) 5.19 (132).46 (.21) OGW656/750 Ordering Example: For AC-64/528 AlumaCore OPGW the part number is OGW469/561 A B 1.00" (25 MM) 3/8 X 3.00 LG. LAG BOLT 2.00" (51 MM) OPGW ELASTOMER BUSHING Urethane Downlead Cushion Clamps These clamps are typically two groove clamps used to guide the cable to splice locations. Clamps are spaced 4 to 6 feet apart to help maintain alignment of the cable down the towers or poles. Various mounting hardware is available for wood and concrete poles and steel lattice towers. Urethane Downlead Cushion Clamps CABLE TYPE Mini-Span 323 ADLC 300/374 Mini-Span 383 ADLC 375/ , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

54 Spiral Vibration Damper for ADSS or OPGW Cable Spiral Vibration Dampers have a helically formed damping section sized for interplay of damper and cable to provide the action/reaction motion that opposed the natural vibration wave. A smaller gripping section gently grips the cable so that cable and fiber are not damaged or distorted and there is no optical signal loss. These PVC Spiral dampers are recommended for the ADSS cable when the combination of span length and tension indicate by vibration review that external vibration protection is required. CABLE NOTE SMALLER HELIX GRIPPING SECTION 8" DAMPING SECTION Optical Ground Wire Spiral Vibration Damper INCHES DIAMETER RANGE MM TOTAL LENGTH INCH (M) OSVD327/ (1.3) OSVD462/ (1.3) OSVD564/ (1.5) ADSS Spiral Vibration Damper DIAMETER RANGE TOTAL LENGTH INCHES MM INCH (M) AVD250/ (1.24) AVD327/ (1.30) AVD462/ (1.35) AVD564/ (1.65) AVD771/ (1.80) AVD877/ (1.91) AVD1001/ (2.29) NOTE: OPGW and ADSS Spiral Vibration Dampers are not interchangeable , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

55 Fiber Optic Cable Non-Armored OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SJ) Acting as the backbone for most of today s fiber based systems, stranded fiber optic cables play a critical role in the high speed network. AFL s Non-Armored Loose Tube fiber optic cables are designed to provide high fiber counts with the flexibility and versatility required for today s most demanding installations. With fiber counts up to 576 and S-Z strand designs for easy mid-span access, AFL s cables comply with EIA/TIA, REA/RUS PE-90 and GR-20. Industry standard designs combined with innovative technologies, such as a dry core product, yield a world class cable that will support today s and tomorrow s technological needs. Cable Components Product Applications Long Haul Networking Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) Trunking Lines Direct to Telecommunications Closet Local Loop Distance Learning Distribution Intrabuilding Backbones Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -30ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC Typical Lengths MAXIMUM LENGTHS* FIBER SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,400 5,000 16,400 5, ,100 4,300 14,000 4, ,800 3,300 11,000 3,300 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. Fiber Specifications MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH (MHZ KM) GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK DISTANCE (METERS) FIBER TYPE 850 NM 1300 NM 1310 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (L) 50/125 Laser-Link N/A N/A (9) Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 (Q) Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode N/A N/A N/A 0.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on bandwidth /modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

56 Fiber Optic Cable Non-Armored OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SJ) NOMINAL NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS FIBER NUMBER OF DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) COUNT TUBES/FIBERS INCHES MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LE006 C5101N1 6 1w/6 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE012 C5101N1 12 1w/12 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE018 C5101N1 18 1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE024 C5101N1 24 2w/12 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE030 C5101N1 30 2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE036 C5101N1 36 3w/12 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE048 C5101N1 48 4w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE060 C5101N1 60 5w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 8.2 (21) 4.1 (11) LE072 C6101N1 72 6w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.0 (22) 4.5 (11.5) LE084 C8101N1 84 7w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 10.4 (27) 5.2 (14) LE096 C8101N1 96 8w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.4 (27) 5.2 (14) LE108 CA101N w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 11.8 (31) 5.9 (16) LE120 CA101N1 120 l0w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 11.8 (31) 5.9 (16) LE132 CC101N w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34) 6.7 (17) LE144 CC101N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34) 6.7 (17) LE216 CI301N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 14.0 (35) 6.9 (18) LE288 CO301N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 17.3 (41) 7.9 (21) LE432 IO301N w/18 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 17.4 (44) 8.7 (22) LE576 OO301N w/24 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 20.1 (51) 10.2 (26) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. Reel Information REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight With Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 320 kg 950 lbs 431 kg AFL typically provides Loose Tube cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request. Larger reel sizes may be required to accomodate long cable lengths. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

57 Fiber Optic Cable Single-Jacket Single-Armor OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SASJ) Acting as the backbone for most of today s fiber based systems, stranded fiber optic cables play a critical role in the high speed network. AFL s Armored Loose Tube Single Jacket/Single Armor fiber optic cables are designed to provide high fiber counts with the flexibility and versatility required for today s most demanding installations, including direct buried. With fiber counts up to 288 and S-Z strand designs for easy mid-span access, AFL s cables comply with EIA/TIA, REA/RUS PE-90 and GR-20. Industry standard designs combined with innovative technologies, such as a dry core product, yield a world class cable that will support today s and tomorrow s technological needs. Product Applications Long Haul Networking Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) Trunking Lines Direct to Telecommunications Closet Local Loop Distance Learning Distribution Intrabuilding Backbones Cable Components Polyethylene outer jacket Optical fiber Gel-filled loose buffer tube Corrugated steel armoring FRP central member Ripcord Water-blocking system Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -30ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC Typical Lengths MAXIMUM LENGTHS* SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE FIBER COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS ,686 6,000 19,686 6,000 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. Fiber Specifications MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH (MHZ KM) GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK DISTANCE (METERS) FIBER TYPE 850 NM 1300 NM 1310 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (L) 50/125 Laser-Link N/A N/A (9) Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 (Q) Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode N/A N/A N/A 0.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on bandwidth /modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

58 Fiber Optic Cable Single-Jacket Single-Armor OSP Loose Tube (LE Series SASJ) NOMINAL NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) FIBER COUNT NUMBER OF TUBES/FIBERS INCHES MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LE006 C5201S1 6 1w/6 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE012 C5201S1 12 1w/12 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE018 C5201S1 18 1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE024 C5201S1 24 2w/12 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE030 C5201S1 30 2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE036 C5201S1 36 3w/12 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE048 C5201S1 48 4w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE060 C5201S1 60 5w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.7 (28) 5.4 (14) LE072 C6201S1 72 6w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 11.4 (29) 5.7 (15) LE084 C8201S1 84 7w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 12.8 (33) 6.4 (16.3) LE096 C8201S1 96 8w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 12.8 (33) 6.4 (16.3) LE108 CA201S w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 14.2 (37) 7.1 (18) LE120 CA201S w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 14.2 (37) 7.1 (18) LE132 CC201S w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 15.7 (40) 7.9 (20) LE144 CC201S w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 15.7 (40) 7.9 (20) LE192 O8201S w/24 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 12.8 (33) 6.4 (163) LE288 OC201S w/24 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 15.7 (40) 7.9 (20) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. Reel Information REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight With Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 320 kg 950 lbs 431 kg AFL typically provides Loose Tube cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request. Larger reel sizes may be required to accomodate long cable lengths. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

59 Fiber Optic Cable All-Dielectric Armored Rodent-Resistant OSP Loose Tube (LN Series) AFL s All-dielectric Rodent-Resistant cable is designed specifically for environments that have an increased risk of rodent infestation and disturbance. The LN-series product line covers the range of fiber-counts of up to 576 fibers. The ultra-hard, non-metallic outer polymer shell reduces risk of transmission interruptions in vital OSP network interconnections. In addition, the cable line meets all applicable RUS, GR-20 and IEC and TIA related design and performance guidelines. Applications Long Haul Networking Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) Steam-tunnel Substreet Drainage Networks Local Loop Airport (FAA-E-2761c, Type B) Cable Components rodent-resistant, low-friction, outer jacket polyethylene inner jacket optical fibers FRP central member ripcords water-blocking system gel-filled loose buffer tube Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -30ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC Typical Lengths MAXIMUM LENGTHS* SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE FIBER COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS ,900 7,000 22,900 8, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,900 7,000 22,900 7, ,600 6,900 22,600 6, ,000 5,200 17,000 5, ,000 4,600 15,000 4, ,800 3,300 10,800 3, ,500 2,000 6,500 2,000 * Longer lengths may be available upon request. Fiber Specifications MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH (MHZ KM) GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK DISTANCE (METERS) FIBER TYPE 850 NM 1300 NM 1310 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (L) 50/125 Laser-Link N/A N/A (9) Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 (Q) Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode N/A N/A N/A 0.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on bandwidth /modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

60 Fiber Optic Cable All-Dielectric Armored Rodent-Resistant OSP Loose Tube (LN Series) NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILN LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS FIBER NUMBER OF DIAMETER NOMINAL WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) COUNT TUBES/FIBERS INCHES MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LN006 C5101N1 6 1w/6 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN012 C5101N1 12 1w/12 (4 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN018 C5101N1 18 1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN024 C5101N1 24 2w/12 (3 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN030 C5101N1 30 2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN036 C5101N1 36 3w/12 (2 fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN048 C5101N1 48 4w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN060 C5101N1 60 5w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 9.8 (25) 4.9 (13) LN072 C6101N1 72 6w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 10.6 (27) 5.3 (14) LN084 C8101N1 84 7w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 12.0 (31) 6.0 (16) LN096 C8101N1 96 8w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 12.0 (31) 6.0 (16) LN108 CA101N w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34) 6.7 (17) LN120 CA101N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 13.4 (34) 6.7 (17) LN132 CC101N w/12 (1 filler) (2670) 200 (890) 15.0 (38) 7.5 (19) LN144 CC101N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 15.0 (38) 7.5 (19) LN216 CI301N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 15.2 (39) 7.6 (20) LN288 CO301N w/12 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 17.4 (44) 8.7 (22) LN432 IO301N w/18 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 18.8 (48) 9.4 (24) LN576 OO301N w/24 (no fillers) (2670) 200 (890) 21.4 (55) 10.7 (28) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. Reel Information REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight With Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 320 kg 950 lbs 431 kg AFL typically provides Loose Tube cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request. Larger reel sizes may be required to accomodate long cable lengths. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

61 Fiber Optic Cable Uniflex Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable Single tube products allow for installations that require a high degree of flexibility combined with a small cable diameter. AFL has designed a cable that has all the characteristics of stranded loose tube cables from a mechanical and environmental standpoint, combined with the high flexibility and small diameter requirements of real world installations. This cable is the ultimate solution for flexible, connectorized applications, as well as crowded ducts in existing fiber applications, and can be lashed to an aerial messenger. Uniflex Indoor/Outdoor cable not only services the outside plant environment, but also qualifies as an Indoor/ Outdoor cable, allowing potential cost savings with fewer splice points. Uniflex Indoor/ Outdoor complies with EIA/TIA standards and is listed for OFNR use per UL standards. Product Applications OFNR Service (Drop) Cables Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) Connectorized Trunking Cables Distance Learning Distribution MSHA Approved for Mining Applications Cable Components outer jacket strength elements buffer tube optical fiber water blocking gel ripcord Temperature Range Operating: -40ºC to +70ºC Storage: -40ºC to +75ºC Installation: -30ºC to +70ºC Maximum Lengths NOMINAL DIAMETER REEL A (42 x 36 x 23) REEL B (58 x 36 x 28) MM FEET METERS FEET METERS ,400 4,995 27,500 8,400 NOMINAL NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS (N) INCHES (CM) FIBER COUNT INCHES (MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LV N1 2 LV N1 4 LV N1 6 LV N (8.4) 50 (75) 600 (2670) 200 (890) 6.7 (17.0) 3.5 (9.0) LV010 A1100N1 10 LV012 C1100N1 12 Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below. 5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link 1000 L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link = Single-mode Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

62 Fiber Optic Cable Riser Single-Jacket I/O Loose Tube (LV Series SJ) Indoor/outdoor stranded loose tube combines the robust mechanical and environmental characteristics of an outside plant cable with the flexibility of an inside plant riser cable. By installing indoor/outdoor stranded loose tube, costly splice locations entering into a building are avoided, being routed directly from the outside plant to telecommunications closets, or main distribution frames (MDF) through the riser of a building and eliminating the "50-foot rule." Indoor/Outdoor Stranded Design loose tube cable is moisture and U.V. resistant, S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access, listed for OFNR use per UL standards, and can be used in both duct and lashed applications. Applications Building Interconnections (Campus LAN) Trunking Lines Direct to Telecommunications Closet Local Loop Distance Learning Distribution Intrabuilding Backbones MSHA Approved for Mining Applications Cable Components PVC jacket strength elements binder water blocking system FRP central member optical fiber rip cord gel-filled loose buffer tube Temperature Specifications TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTALLATION -30ºC to +70ºC OPERATING -40ºC to +70ºC STORAGE -40ºC to +75ºC Typical Lengths MAXIMUM LENGTHS* SINGLE-MODE MULTIMODE FIBER COUNT FEET METERS FEET METERS ,900 7,000 22,900 7,000 * Longer lengths may be available. Fiber Specifications MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM) OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH (MHZ KM) GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK DISTANCE (METERS) FIBER TYPE 850 NM 1300 NM 1310 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM (6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (5) 50/125 GIGA-Link N/A N/A (L) 50/125 Laser-Link N/A N/A (9) Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 (Q) Non-zero Dispersion-shifted Single-mode N/A N/A N/A 0.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A (K) AFL G.657.A1 Single-mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5000 Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on bandwidth /modal dispersion constraints. Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

63 Fiber Optic Cable Riser Single-Jacket I/O Loose Tube (LV Series SJ) NOMINAL NOMINAL MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS DIAMETER WEIGHT LBS. (N) INCHES (CM) FIBER NUMBER OF LBS/1,000 FT COUNT TUBES/FIBERS INCHES (MM) (KG/KM) SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM LV006 C5101N1 6 1w/6 (4 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 107 (159) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV012 C5101N1 12 1w/12 (4 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 108 (160) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV018 C5101N1 18 1w/12, 1w/6 (3 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 108 (161) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV024 C5101N1 24 2w/12 (3 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 108 (161) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV030 C5101N1 30 2w/12, 1w/6 (2 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 109 (162) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV036 C5101N1 36 3w/12 (2 fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 109 (162) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV048 C5101N1 48 4w/12 (1 filler) 0.51 (12.9) 110 (164) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV060 C5101N1 60 5w/12 (No fillers) 0.51 (12.9) 111 (165) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.2 (26) 5.1 (13) LV072 C6101N1 72 6w/12 (No fillers) 0.54 (13.7) 128 (190) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 10.8 (28) 5.4 (14) LV084 C8101N1 84 7w/12 (1 filler) 0.61 (15.5) 158 (236) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 12.2 (31) 6.1 (16) LV096 C8101N1 96 8w/12 (No fillers) 0.61 (15.5) 159 (237) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 12.2 (31) 6.1 (16) LV108 CA101N w/12 (1 filler) 0.69 (17.4) 197 (294) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 14.0 (35) 7.0 (18) LV120 CA101N w/12 (No fillers) 0.69 (17.4) 198 (295) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 14.0 (35) 7.0 (18) LV132 CC101N w/12 (1 filler) 0.76 (19.3) 242 (360) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 15.2 (39) 7.6 (20) LV144 CC101N w/12 (No fillers) 0.76 (19.3) 243 (361) 600 (2700) 200 (890) 15.2 (39) 7.6 (20) Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice Fiber Types Replace asterisk ( ) in AFL number with number in the Fiber Specifications table on previous page. Reel Information REEL A REEL B REEL C REEL D REEL E ITEM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM INCHES CM Reel Height Reel Width Outside Reel Width Inside Drum Diameter Arbor Hole Diameter Reel Weight With Lagging 180 lbs 82 kg 420 lbs 191 kg 685 lbs 311 kg 710 lbs 320 kg 950 lbs 431 kg AFL typically provides Loose Tube cable on several standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request. Larger reel sizes may be required to accomodate long cable lengths. or (800) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

64 LightLink LANSystem 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel The AFL 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 36 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 1 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 1RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. Standard 1RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays. Specifications Designed around Telcordia GR-63NEBS Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility Standard density: up to 18-fiber High density: up to 36-fiber LGX 118 compatible Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward 1RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to three splice tray kits Features Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments Most common connector styles and types available Compatible with industry standard equipment frames Modular design Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components Dimensions Applications Telecommunications closets Data Centers Customer Premise LAN / WAN Networks Central Offices / Headends Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals FTTH / FTTB Networks DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT (C) RACK UNLOADED IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT / 36 4 lbs. LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

65 LightLink LANSystem 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired. When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters. Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). Color Loading Charactor FM B S 0010 W = White B = Black E = Empty H = Half-loaded with adapters L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails (Patch and Splice only) S = Preterminated with tight buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only) Cable Stub Length (M) 0002 = 2 meters 0004 = 4 meters etc. Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 12 PSC adapters (2 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length. CONFIGURATION CON012P 1 RU PATCH PANELS 12 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM PSC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM UST adapters (2 Six Packs) FM PST adapters (2 Six Packs) FM UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs) FM PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs) FM ASC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM UFC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM USC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM AFC adapters (2 Six Packs) FM CON024HD 1 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS 24 FIBERS LGX UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs) FM PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs) FM PDL (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs) FM CNS012P 1U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS 12 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM PSC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM UST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM PST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray FM PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray FM ASC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM UFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM USC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM AFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM CNS024HD 1 RU HIGH-DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS 24 FIBERS LGX UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray FM PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray FM USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray FM Accessories DESCRIPTION Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard Density (1 splice tray) Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density (2 splice trays) Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard Density (1 splice tray) Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density (2 splice trays) Kit, Lock, for CON/CNS Panels Connector/Adapter Key TYPE ASC ASF PSC PSF USC USF PST UST AFC PFC UFC ADL PLC PDL ULC UDL DESCRIPTION SC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM SC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM SC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM SC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM SC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM SC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM ST Physical Polish, Simplex, MM ST Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM FC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM FC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM FC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM LC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM LC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM LC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM LC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM LC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM FM FM FM R FM R FM Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

66 LightLink LANSystem 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel The AFL 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 72 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 2 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 2RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. Standard 2RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays. Specifications Designed around Telcordia GR-63NEBS Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility Standard density: up to 36 fiber High density: up to 72 fiber LGX 118 compatible Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward 2RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to four splice tray kits Features Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments Most common connector styles and types available Compatible with industry standard equipment frames Modular design Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components Dimensions Applications Telecommunications closets Data Centers Customer Premise LAN / WAN Networks Central Offices / Headends Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals FTTH / FTTB Networks DEPTH (A) WIDTH (B) HEIGHT(C) RACK UNLOADED IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT / 72* 5 lbs. * 72 fiber capacity not available in Patch and Splice configuration. LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

67 LightLink LANSystem 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired. When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters. Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). Color Loading Charactor FM B S 0010 W = White B = Black E = Empty H = Half-loaded with adapters L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails (Patch and Splice only) S = Preterminated with tight buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only) Cable Stub Length (M) 0002 = 2 meters 0004 = 4 meters etc. Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 24 PSC adapters (4 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length. CONFIGURATION CON024P 2 RU PATCH PANELS 24 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Beige) FM UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM UDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Blue) FM PDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Beige) FM ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Green) FM UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM USC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Blue) FM AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX FM Accessories DESCRIPTION Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (1 splice tray) FM Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (2 splice trays) FM Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (3 splice trays) FM Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (4 splice trays) FM Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM R (1 splice tray) Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM R (2 splice trays) Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM R (3 splice trays) Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon FM R (4 splice trays) Kit, Lock, for CON / CNS Panels FM CNS024P 2U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS 24 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM UDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX, Splice tray FM PDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX, Splice tray FM ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM USC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray FM Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. Connector/Adapter Key TYPE DESCRIPTION ASC SC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM ASF SC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM PSC SC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM PSF SC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM USC SC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM USF SC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM PST ST Physical Polish, Simplex, MM UST ST Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM AFC FC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM PFC FC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM UFC FC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM ADL LC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM PLC LC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM PDL LC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM ULC LC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM UDL LC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

68 LightLink LANSystem 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel The AFL 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 4 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein. Standard 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. Specifications Telcordia GR-63 NEBS Tested Aluminum construction per ASTMB209 Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility Standard density: up to 72-fiber High density: up to 144-fiber LGX 118 compatible Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward Features Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments Most common connector styles and types available Compatible with industry standard equipment frames LGX compatible master plate and footprint (118 mm) Modular design Provides maximum protection of optical components Applications Telecommunications closets Data Centers Customer Premise LAN / WAN Networks Central Offices / Headends Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals FTTH / FTTB Networks Dimensions DEPTH (A) IN INCHES WIDTH (B) IN INCHES HEIGHT (C) IN INCHES RACK UNITS FIBER CAPACITY UNLOADED WEIGHT MATERIAL GAUGE /96/144 9 lbs mm LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

69 LightLink LANSystem 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired. When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters. Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC). Color Loading Charactor C B S 0010 W = White B = Black E = Empty H = Half-loaded with adapters S = Preterminated with tight buffered CPC cable stub (Riser) (Patch only) R = Preterminated with OSP loose tube cable stub (Patch only) Cable Stub Length (M) 0002 = 2 meters 0004 = 4 meters etc. Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 72 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length. CONFIGURATION CON072P 4 RU PATCH PANELS 72 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY C PSC adapters (12 Six Packs) C UST adapters (12 Six Packs) C PST adapters (12 Six Packs) C UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM ASC adapters (12 Six Packs) C UFC adapters (12 Six Packs) C USC adapters (12 Six Packs) C AFC adapters (12 Six Packs) C PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs) FM CON096P 4 RU PATCH PANELS 96 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM PSC adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM UST adapters (12 Eight Packs) C PST adapters (12 Eight Packs) FM ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C USC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) C Notes: 1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified. 2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration. CONFIGURATION CON144HD 4 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS 144 FIBERS LGX118 EMPTY FM UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C ADL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) C USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) FM UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM USC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) FM Connector/Adapter Key TYPE ASC ASF PSC PSF USC USF PST UST AFC PFC UFC ADL PLC PDL ULC UDL DESCRIPTION SC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM SC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM SC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM SC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM SC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM SC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM ST Physical Polish, Simplex, MM ST Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM FC Angle Polish, Simplex, SM FC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM FC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM LC Angle Polish, Duplex, SM LC Physical Polish, Simplex, MM LC Physical Polish, Duplex, MM LC Ultra Polish, Simplex, SM LC Ultra Polish, Duplex, SM , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

70 Xpress Fiber Management (XFM ) 4RU Patch Panel The Xpress Fiber Management (XFM) 4RU patch panel is a rack mountable interconnect point specifically designed to manage dense fiber applications. Based on the LGX intermateability platform, the panel is fully compatible with AFL's XFM Optical Cassette, Poli-MOD and WDM solutions, offering enhanced management of densities up to 288F using MTP/MPO, single fiber, or patch and splice methodologies. Routing rings on the top and bottom of the front panel provide enhanced cable routing allowing cable assemblies to exit comfortably. This panel can be provisioned with a key lock at the time of order for secure environments. Features Aluminum construction Textured black powder coat finish Universal WECO/TIA 19"/23" rack compatibility (12) LGX 118 adapter plate / module mounting positions Mounting depth adjustable from flush to 8" in 1" increments Applications Data Centers Enterprise Networks Telecommunications Closets Central Offices / Headends Specifications DEPTH (A) FRONT WIDTH (B) REAR WIDTH (C) HEIGHT (D) RACK UNLOADED IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES IN INCHES UNITS CAPACITY WEIGHT (12) LGX lbs. DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Xpress Fiber Management 4U Patch Panel, Black, Empty XFM-4U-B-0 FM B Xpress Fiber Management 4U Patch Panel, Black, Empty, Key Lock XFM-4U-B-K FM B LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

71 LightLink 500 Optical Splicing and Distribution Enclosure The LightLink (LL) 500 Optic Splicing and Distribution Enclosure provides for organizing, splicing and interconnecting fibers in broadband, distribution and building entrance applications. The enclosure features a scratch and corrosion resistant powder paint coating base and a fully gasketed hinged cover. A unique self-sizing grommet design allows for express and pre-terminated cable installation. The LL-500 supports up to five LL-2450 splice trays for up to 60 single fusion splices or three LL-4850 splice trays (not included in base unit) and an optional 12 fiber, hinged Interconnect Module. LL-500 with interconnect kit installed Features NEMA 3 rated enclosure Independent cable strain relief system Cable entry/exit grommet seals Fiber routing system Splice tray support system Hinged cover Specifications Supports optional Interconnect Modules Interconnect Module supports up to 12 SC bulkhead adapters Secured with a standard padlock 4 cable ports with standard grommets 8 cable ports with optional expansion kits PARAMETER VALUE Material Steel Coatings Electrostatically applied, powder coat Color Antique white Cable Ports 4-8 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. Min. O.D.) " LL-500 with LL-2450 splice tray installed Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits " " Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 17.5 x 9.0 x 4.0 (44.45 x x 10.16) Weight lbs. (kg) 6.5 (2.95) DESCRIPTION LL-500-U-0 FM LL-500 Interconnect Kit with SC UPC adapters FM LL-500 Interconnect Kit with SC APC adapters FM LL-500 Interconnect Kit without adapters FM LL-500 with Multi-port Grommets FM LL-2450 Single Fusion Splice Tray (stores 12 single fusion splices) LL-4850 Mass Fusion Splice Tray (stores 8 mass fusion sleeves - 96 fibers) LL-500 Multi-port Grommet Kit, 6 drop cable entry up to 0.37 OD FC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

72 OptiNID 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure The OptiNID (OPN) 760XL is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 24 bulkhead adapters in two 118 LGX compatible adapter plates and is equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to 32 single fusion splices. The OPN-760XL can be either wall or pole-mounted. Features Capacity for up to two 118 LGX compatible adapter plates Rugged weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts Slip-in grommets allow pre-connectorized cable deployment Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock Security cover option available Specifications OPN-760XL with optional security cover kit PARAMETER VALUES Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress F ( C) 14 days at 159 (70.55) Temperature Cycling with Humidity F ( C) 150 day cycling from ( ) with 95% RH Impact Test F ( C) -40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces Drop Test F ( C) -40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times Rain 24 hours at 10 psi UV Resistance (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-G26-84 Salt Fog (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-BLL7-90 Flammability UL94-5V Chemical Resistance 30 Days at 100 F and 95% RH Subject to: Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide Material UL listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 13 x 13 x 3.75 (32.5 x 32.5 x 9.5) Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter Input 4 x (2.2) 3/4" conduit Covers Standard molded-in snap finger and 3/8" hex head fastener OPN-760XL with 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit DESCRIPTION BASE PRODUCT 1,2 OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, No Security Cover DM OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, Security Cover DM ACCESSORIES 3 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit (includes 2) DM OPN-760XL Security Cover Kit DM OPN-760XL Pole Mounting Kit DM Notes: 1. All standard OPN-760XL configurations come equipped with four slip-in rubber grommets and a splice tray equipped for 32 single fusion splices. 2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations. 3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits. 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

73 OptiNID 500 Optical Demarcation Closure The OptiNID (OPN) 500 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. Small form factor for FTTH demarcation applications, the closure is capable of housing up to six bulkhead adapters in one 118 LGX compatible adapter plate, and is equipped with an integrated splice tray, which holds up to six single fusion splices. The OPN-500 can be either wall or pole-mounted. Features Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts Capacity for one 118 LGX compatible adapter plate Provider override for customer lock 3/4" NPT conduit fitting, compression cable fittings or grommeted entry ports Specifications PARAMETER VALUES Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress F ( C) 14 days at 159 (70.55) Temperature Cycling with Humidity F ( C) 150 day cycling from ( ) with 95% RH Impact Test F ( C) -40 (-40), 5 ft/lbs on all external surfaces Drop Test F ( C) -40 (-40), 5 ft onto concrete surface four times Rain 24 hours at 10 psi UV Resistance (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-G26-84 Salt Fog (Days Exposed) 60 per ASTM-BLL7-90 Flammability UL94-5V Chemical Resistance 30 Days at 100 F and 95% RH Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide Material UL listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm) 6.3 x 7.8 x 2.0 (15.7 x 19.7 x 5.0) Cable Entrance in. (cm) diameter - Input 1 x 3/4 NPT (1.130 ), 2 x 1/2 NPT (0.875 ) Covers Standard, molded-in snap finger and "F" termination DESCRIPTION BASE PRODUCT 1,2 OptiNID OPN-500, No Adapters OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/UPC Adapter OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/APC Adapter OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters, 6 x 1 m 900 μm Pigtails ACCESSORIES 3 Heyco M3234 Compression Fitting, 18 mm to 11 mm Grip (includes 4) Left Port Only Kit, Six-Position Splice Chip, (includes 10) DM DM DM DM DM DM DM Notes: 1. All standard OPN-500 configurations come equipped with a ¾ NPT fitting, rubber grommet and Heyco 3231 compression fitting, along with a splice chip for six single fusion splices. 2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations. 3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits. LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

74 OptiNID Optical Demarcation Accessories Heyco Compression Fittings for OPN-300 Series and OPN-500 Used on the bottom entry ports of the OPN-300 Series and OPN-500 for a tight compression fitting. The Heyco M3234 fits into the larger left port and can compress from 18 mm to 11 mm in port size. The Heyco M3231 fits into the smaller middle and right ports and can compress from 11 mm to 4 mm. Kits include nylon locknuts. DESCRIPTION Heyco M3234 Compression Fitting, 18 mm to 11 mm Grip (includes 4). Left Port Only Heyco M3231 Compression Fitting, 11 mm to 4 mm Grip (includes 4). Middle and Right Port DM DM NPT Conduit Fittings for OPN-300 Series and OPN-500 Used on the bottom entry ports of the OPN-300 series and OPN-500 as an open port or to accept NPT conduit. The ¾" NPT fitting has a through-hole size of 0.71" and can accept ¾" NPT conduit. The ½" NPT fitting has a through-hole size of 0.51" and can accept ½" NPT conduit. Kits include nylon locknuts. DESCRIPTION ¾" NPT Conduit Fitting (includes 4) Left Port Only DM ½" NPT Conduit Fitting (includes 4) Middle and Right Port DM Rubber Grommet for OPN-300 Series and OPN-500 Used on the middle and right entry ports of the OPN-300 series and OPN-500. The rubber grommets can be easily inserted to create a grommetted entry port or to seal an unused port. DESCRIPTION Rubber Grommet, 0.875" (includes 10) DM , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 0,

75 Opti-NID Optical Demarcation Accessories (cont.) Splice Chip Kit for OPN-500 Used on the OPN-500 to add an additional splice chip to the splice area to increase the splice capacity to 12 single fusion splices. The chip has an adhesive back, allowing it to adhere to multiple locations within the box. DESCRIPTION Kit, Six-Position Splice Chip (includes 10) DM Pipe Transition Kit for OPN-760XL Used on the OPN-760XL to create a ¾" NPT transition fitting. The fitting slides into any of the four entry ports on the OPN-760XL and securely clips into place. The ¾" NPT fitting has a through-hole size of 0.67" and can accept ¾" NPT conduit. DESCRIPTION 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit (includes 2) DM Security Cover Kit for OPN-760XL Used on the OPN-760XL to create a lockable security cover for provider access. The cover fits over the back portion of the OPN-760XL, covering the splice tray and provider side of the adapters and locks into place with a star head bolt. DESCRIPTION OPN-760XL Security Cover Kit DM Pole Mounting Kit for OPN-760XL Used on the OPN-760XL to provide an easy pole mounting solution. The plate mounts to the back of the OPN-760XL and provides arms for straps or bolts to adhere to a pole. DESCRIPTION OPN-760XL Pole Mounting Kit DM , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 0,

76 LightLink Adapter Plates LightLink Adapter Plates add versatility to AFL s panel product line. Adapter plates are compatible with industry standard platforms allowing for easy upgrades to existing panels. Adapter Plates come preloaded with adapters and are available in 6, 8, 12 and 24 pack versions for single-fiber adapters. Higher fiber counts are achievable with multi-fiber adapters. Blank plates are also available for unused space in panels. Specifications LC FC ST SC Features Metal Plate with Nylatches Polyurethane powder coated (white or black) LGX compatible DIMENSION A 118 mm LGX 170 mm LGX ADAPTER TYPE SIMPLEX/DUPLEX/ QUAD ADAPTER COLOR FIBER COUNT PLATE HEIGHT PLATE COLOR BLANK FM BLANK BLANK NA 0 LGX (118) BLACK FM BLANK BLANK NA 0 LGX (118) WHITE FM BLANK BLANK NA 0 LGX (118) SMOOTH BLACK FM BLANK BLANK NA 0 LGX (170) BLACK FM BLANK BLANK NA 0 LGX (170) WHITE SC FM SC DUPLEX AQUA 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX AQUA 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX BLACK 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX AQUA 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BEIGE 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX BLACK 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC DUPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) WHITE LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

77 LightLink Adapter Plates (cont.) ADAPTER TYPE SIMPLEX/DUPLEX/ QUAD ADAPTER COLOR FIBER COUNT PLATE HEIGHT PLATE COLOR SC FM SC SIMPLEX AQUA 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLACK 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM TW SC SIMPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM TW SC SIMPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX AQUA 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BEIGE 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BEIGE 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX BLACK 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 8F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX BLUE 8F LGX (118) WHITE FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 8F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC SIMPLEX GREEN 8F LGX (118) WHITE LC FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX AQUA 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX AQUA 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC QUAD AQUA 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 24F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 24F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX AQUA 24F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 24F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC QUAD AQUA 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 24F LGX (170) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 24F LGX (170) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 24F LGX (170) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 24F LGX (170) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 24F LGX (170) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 24F LGX (170) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 6F LGX (118) BLACK , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

78 LightLink Adapter Plates (cont.) ADAPTER TYPE SIMPLEX/DUPLEX/ QUAD ADAPTER COLOR FIBER COUNT PLATE HEIGHT PLATE COLOR LC FM LC DUPLEX BLACK 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX GREEN 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX AQUA 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLUE 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BLACK 24F LGX (118) BLACK FM LC DUPLEX BEIGE 6F LGX (118) WHITE ST FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 8F LGX (118) BLACK FM ST SIMPLEX METAL SM/MM 8F LGX (118) WHITE FC FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 12F LGX (118) WHITE FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 12F LGX (170) BLACK FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 12F LGX (170) WHITE FM FC SIMPLEX METAL, GREEN DUST CAP 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM FC SIMPLEX METAL, GREEN DUST CAP 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 8F LGX (118) BLACK FM FC SIMPLEX METAL 8F LGX (118) WHITE MISC FM HEYCO SIMPLEX BLACK 12F LGX (118) BLACK FM MTP SIMPLEX BLACK 36F LGX (118) BLACK FM HEYCO SIMPLEX BLACK 6F LGX (118) BLACK FM SC-ST HYBRID SIMPLEX BLUE-METAL 6F LGX (118) WHITE FM MTP SIMPLEX BLACK 72F LGX (118) BLACK FM MTP SIMPLEX BLACK 96F LGX (118) BLACK , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

79 Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels AFL s pigtail assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance. Featuring a unified construction allowing for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia requirements. Splicer Connector Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Cable Type 250 µm, 900 µm Insertion Loss < 0.15 db Return Loss > 40 db Operating Temperature (900 µm Fiber Coating) PVC Nylon TPEE -40ºC to 75ºC 0ºC to 75ºC -25ºC to 75ºC FIBER CONNECTOR INTERFACE POLISH TYPE SC ST LC CPC PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER APC SMF C CS UPC SMF C C C PC 62.5 µm C C C PC 50 µm CS CS CS PC 50 µm LO CS CS CS µm TIGHT-BUFFERED PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER APC SMF C CS UPC SMF C CS CS PC 62.5 µm CS CS CS PC 50 µm CS CS CS PC 50 µm LO CS CS CS Jumper Specifications PARAMETER VALUE LC SC ST FC LC-APC SC-APC MT Insertion Loss SM max MM max Return Loss SM max db db db db db db db MM max db db Cable Bend Radius Standard min <30 mm Bend Insensitive min <15 mm Durability 200 cycles 500 cycles Operating Temperature -40ºC to +85ºC Storage Temperature -40ºC to +85ºC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

80 12-Fiber SC/UPC Configuration Poli-MOD Patch and Splice Module AFL's new Poli-MOD is an innovative patch and splice module, which offers an inventive and effective means to accommodate up to 24 fiber interconnections in an industry-standard, single-slot LGX 118 footprint. The new Poli-MOD offers a unique and robust way to secure cable without the need for time-wasting, tie-wrap alternatives. Additionally, the module leverages a creative snap-in splice sleeve cradle to securely manage both single and ribbon fiber arrangements. These features provide the capacity to outfit a standard 4RU rack-mount panel with up to 288-fiber interconnections. The Poli-MOD is also offered in an arrangement that supports the low loss budget requirements of Distributed Antenna System (DAS) networks. This is accomplished through the elimination of an interconnection point while providing a robust splicing environment for rack and wall-mount panel applications. Features 24-fiber interconnection capacity LGX 118 compatibility (single-slot module) Effective and time-saving cable mounting mechanism (no tie-wraps necessary) Inventive splice sleeve cradle Available in SC, LC, ST and FC connector arrangements Organized fiber routing Fixed solution, no moving parts Multi-directional cable entry access DIN rail mountable (with DIN Mount Kit) Applications Telecommunications Closets Data Centers Customer Premise Local Area Networks Wide Area Networks Central Offices Hub Sites Cabinets Remote Terminals Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

81 Poli-MOD Patch and Splice Module Example: PM-L-12-ASC-0-S-01 PM L 12 ASC 0 S 01 Configuration Fiber/Connector Count Connector Type 3 Fiber Type Fiber Arrangement Packaging E = Empty (Splicing Only) H = Half Loaded (Adapter Plate only) L = Loaded (Adapter Plate & Pigtails) D = DAS Poli-MOD 1 06 = 6 Fibers/Connectors 12 = 12 Fibers/Connectors 24 = 24 Fibers/Connectors 2 XX = Empty 1. DAS Poli-MOD requires specialty packaging and is packaged as "1 Poli-MOD per box" ONLY Fibers/Connectors are only available in a LC Duplex configuration. 3. Angle and Ultra-Polished connector types are only available with single-mode fiber configurations. ASC = Angle-Polished SC USC = Ultra-Polished SC PSC = Multimode SC ALC = Angle-Polished LC ULC = Ultra-Polished LC PLC = Multimode LC UST = Ultra-Polished ST PST = Multimode ST AFC = Angle-Polished FC UFC = Ultra-Polished FC PFC = Multimode FC XXX = Empty 0 = Single-mode (G.657.A1 BIF) 1 = 62.5 μm (OM1) 2 = 50 μm (OM2) 3 = 50 μm (OM3) 4 = 50 μm (OM4) X = Empty S = Single/Standard R = Ribbon 3 = 3 mm, 3 meter DAS X = No Fiber (Half Loaded or Empty) 01 = 1 Poli-MOD per box* 06 = 6 Poli-MODs per box 12 = 12 Poli-MODs per box Connector Color Codes CONNECTOR APC (Angled Polish Connector) UPC (Ultra Polish Connector) PC-OM1 PC-OM2 PC-OM3 / PC-OM4 COLOR Green Blue Beige Black Aqua Poli-MOD Kits/Accessories DESCRIPTION Poli-MOD Cable Mounting Clip Kit Poli-MOD Spiral Wrap Kit Fusion Splice Sleeve, FP-03, 40 mm Adapter Bracket for Mounting Single Poli-MOD, angled Adapter Bracket for Mounting Single Poli-MOD, flat Corning CCH and PCH 145 mm Adapter Bracket DIN Mount Kit, LGX 118 FM FM S FM B FM B FM FM Dimensions 6.07 in. (154 mm) 1.14 in. (29 mm) 4.14 in. (105 mm) 5.12 in. (130 mm) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

82 Field Master Field-Installable Connectors Field Master Connectors, for field-termination of fiber optics, feature high-precision, highreliability and low-applied connector cost. Durable metal components, industry-standard connector designs, and proven crimp technology give the customer peace-of-mind that their installed network is steady and reliable. Field Master Tool Kits come complete with all necessary tools and consumables for the professional installation of Field Master Connectors. Features High-precision ceramic ferrules ensure fiber alignment and repeatable performance Rugged metal connector bodies provide sturdy cable terminations Industry standard interfaces allow interoperability with media equipment Meets EIA/TIA 568B performance requirements Field proven crimp technology improves connector/cable tensile performance Applications Premise environments Desk for LAN environments Patch panels Direct equipment termination Fiber to the Subscriber (FTTx) applications Repair / replacement requirements CONNECTOR FIBER TYPE BOOT COLOR * SC Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Multimode Black CS SC Field Master Connector (3.0 mm boot) Multimode Beige CS SC Field Master Connector (900 µm & 3.0 mm boot) Multimode Black /Beige CS SC Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Single-mode Blue CS SC Field Master Connector (3.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS SC Field Master Connector (900 µm & 3.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS ST Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Multimode Black CS ST Field Master Connector (3.0 mm boot) Multimode Black CS ST Field Master Connector (900 µm & 3.0 mm boot) Multimode Black CS ST Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Single-mode Blue CS ST Field Master Connector (3.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS ST Field Master Connector (900 µm & 3.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS LC Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Multimode White CS LC Field Master Connector (2.0 mm boot) Multimode White CS LC Field Master Connector (900 µm boot) Single-mode Blue CS LC Field Master Connector (2.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS LC Duplex Field Master Connector (2.0 mm boot) Multimode White CS LC Duplex Field Master Connector (2.0 mm boot) Single-mode Blue CS * Packaged 100 pieces per bag , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2.1,

83 Field Master Tool Kit Field Master Tool Kit comes with tools and consumables to professionally install Field Master connectors. Crimp Tool sold separately. Features Quick and easy to use Compact Complete instructions included For use with SC, ST, and LC Field Master Connectors DESCRIPTION Field Master Tool Kit Kit includes: Strip Template Film, Lap, 5 inch disc, AL203, 3µm (10 per pack) Film, Lap, 5 inch disc, AL203, 1µm (10 per pack) Film, Lap, 5 inch disc, Diamond, 3µm (1 per pack) Rubber Polishing Pad (5 ) Sharpie Permanent Marker Fiber Stripper Kevlar Scissors Scribe Tool Polishing Puck - SC, ST Polishing Puck - LC Cletop Stick Cleaner Fiber Preparation Fluid (3 oz) Applicator Tips for Adhesive Water Bottle (1 oz) Field Installable Adhesive with MSDS (1.75 oz) Field Installable Primer with MSDS (1.75 oz) Lint Free Cloth Wipes Installation Instructions (SC, ST, LC) Carrying Case FM CS CS CS CS C C CS01205 C C CS CS C FPF C C C C FM CS C Crimp Tool for Field Master Connectors ITEM DESCRIPTION Crimp Tool with Die Set (SC, ST & LC) (Crimp diameters: 0.128" hex, 0.151" hex, 0.178" hex, 0.197" hex, 0.215" hex) CS , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

84 Features No Epoxy, No Polish Low Insertion Loss Fiber Can Be Reinserted up to Three Times 3.0 mm, 2.0 mm and 900 μm Cordage Compatibility VFI Accessory to Confirm Proper Installation Applications Premise/Enterprise Networks LAN/WAN Connections Patch Panels Equipment Termination FTTx Applications Field Repair/Replacement Equipment Test Leads FASTConnect Field-Installable Connectors FASTConnect are factory pre-polished, field-installable connectors that completely eliminate the need for hand polishing in the field. Proven mechanical splice technology ensuring precision fiber alignment, a factory pre-cleaved fiber stub and a proprietary index-matching gel combine to offer an immediate low loss termination to either single-mode or multimode optical fibers. FAST Connectors are compatible with 250 µm and 900 µm optical fibers, as well as 900 µm, 2 mm and 3 mm cordage. All primary fiber types are supported, and each connector is color coded per industry standard requirements to aide in identification during and after installation. A factory-installed wedge clip (included with each connector) is removed and discarded upon completion of the termination. Incorporated into this device is an innovative, translucent wedge enabling the use of a common VFI to provide a "pass/fail" signal once physical contact is achieved. Specifications PARAMETER Insertion Loss: Return Loss at Room Temperature: Operating Temperature *Angle/Flat Cleaves **Angle/Angle Cleaves TIA/EIA-568-C.3 Compliant TIA/EIA-604 (FOCIS) Compliant FIBER TYPE Single-mode - UPC Single-mode - APC Multimode - PC Single-mode - UPC Single-mode - APC-AU* Single-mode - APC-AA** Multimode HOUSING COLOR CABLE SIZE VALUE Average: 0.2 db, Maximum: 0.5 db Average: 0.3 db, Maximum: 0.6 db Average: 0.1 db, Maximum: 0.5 db Average: -55 db, Maximum: -45 db Average: -55 db, Maximum: -50 db Average: -65 db, Maximum: -60 db Average: -25 db, Maximum: -20 db -40 C to +75 C PACKAGE OF 6 PACKAGE OF 100 FASTCONNECT SC Multimode 62.5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-SC-MM FAST-SC-MM Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-SC-MM50-6 FAST-SC-MM Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-SC-MM50L-6 FAST-SC-MM50L µm Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-SC-SM-6 FAST-SC-SM-100 Single-mode, APC-AU Green FAST-SC-SMAU-6 FAST-SC-SMAU-100 Single-mode, APC-AA Green FAST-SC-SMAA-6 FAST-SC-SMAA-100* FASTCONNECT ST Multimode 62.5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-ST-MM FAST-ST-MM Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-ST-MM50-6 FAST-ST-MM µm Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-ST-MM50L-6 FAST-ST-MM50L-100 Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-ST-SM-6 FAST-ST-SM-100 FASTCONNECT LC Multimode 62.5/125 µm, OM1 Beige FAST-LC-MM FAST-LC-MM Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black FAST-LC-MM50-6 FAST-LC-MM µm Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua FAST-LC-MM50L-6 FAST-LC-MM50L-100 Single-mode, UPC Blue FAST-LC-SM-6 FAST-LC-SM-100 * Requires FAST APC Tool Kit for installation U.S. Patents: 5,963,699 / 5,984,532 / 6,179,482 / 7,003,208 / 7,258, AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 11,

85 FASTConnect Field-Installable Connectors Accessories DESCRIPTION BOOT KITS FOR 2 MM AND 3 MM CORDAGE COLOR CABLE SIZE PACK OF 6 PACK OF mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST Black 2 mm FAST-BOOT-2MM-6 FAST-BOOT-2MM mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST Black 3 mm FAST-BOOT-3MM-6 FAST-BOOT-3MM-100 DUPLEX CLIPS LC Duplex Clip (LC only) Transparent CS CS TOOL KITS FAST UPC Tool Kit For all UPC style connectors and SC/ APC-AU (CT-30A Cleaver) CS FAST UPC Tool Kit For all UPC style connectors and SC/APC-AU (CT-06A Cleaver) CS FAST APC Tool Kit For SC/APC-AA connectors (OX-FAC-08 Cleaver) CS VISUAL FAULT IDENTIFIERS AFL NOYES VFI 2 VFI AFL NOYES HiLite VFI mm Universal Adapter (LC Connectors) MR Testing HOLD 1 sec 1 2 >POM< Before Fiber Insertion HOLD 1 sec 1 2 >POM< After Fiber Insertion AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 11,

86 FUSEConnect Fusion-Spliced, Field-Installable Connectors AFL s FUSEConnect fusion-spliced, field installable connectors are uniquely designed and feature only four to five components. The factory pre-polished ferrule eliminates the need for polishing, adhesives, and crimping in the field, which minimizes the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap. FUSEConnect Connectors (SC, FC, LC, ST) FUSEConnect utilizes a fusion splicer to terminate the connector in the field, addressing return loss concerns present in analog optical networks. This advanced process yields true APC performance for SC/APC and LC/APC configurations, and is compliant to GR-326-CORE. FUSEConnect is compatible with Fujikura fusion splicers and most other fiber holder-based fusion splicing platforms. Features Field installable No adhesives, crimping or polishing True APC performance MM compliant to TIA/EIA568C.3 Compatible with most fusion splicers Applications Connectorization in: - RF-overlay FTTP networks - Cable TV backbone networks - Outside plant - FTTD - MDU FTTP Cabling Central office connector replacement Data center installation FUSEConnect in Fusion Splicer Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Connector Type SC, LC, FC, ST Cable Type 900 µm, 2 mm, 3 mm Polish APC, UPC, PC Insertion Loss SM: 0.15 db (average), 0.3 db (maximum) / MM: 0.10 db (average), 0.3 db (maximum) Return Loss SM: -65 db (APC), -55 db (UPC) / MM: -35 db (PC) Operating Temperature -40 C to +75 C * CONN. BOOT TYPE TYPE UPC SM APC SM PC 62.5 µm MM PC 50 µm MM PC 50 µm LOMMF (Blue) (Green) (Beige) (Black) (AQUA) ** SC 900 µm FUSE-SC9SMU-6 FUSE-SC9SMA-6 FUSE-SC9M62-6 FUSE-SC9M50-6 FUSE-SC9M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-SC3SMU-6 FUSE-SC3SMA-6 FUSE-SC3M62-6 FUSE-SC3M50-6 FUSE-SC3M50L-6 LC 900 µm FUSE-LC9SMU-6 FUSE-LC9SMA-6 FUSE-LC9M62-6 FUSE-LC9M50-6 FUSE-LC9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-LC2SMU-6 FUSE-LC2SMA-6 FUSE-LC2M62-6 FUSE-LC2M50-6 FUSE-LC2M50L-6 FC 900 µm FUSE-FC9SMU-6 FUSE-FC9M62-6 FUSE-FC9M50-6 FUSE-FC9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-FC2SMU-6 FUSE-FC2M62-6 FUSE-FC2M50-6 FUSE-FC2M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-FC3SMU-6 FUSE-FC3M62-6 FUSE-FC3M50-6 FUSE-FC3M50L-6 ST 900 µm FUSE-ST9SMU-6 FUSE-ST9M62-6 FUSE-ST9M50-6 FUSE-ST9M50L-6 2 mm FUSE-ST2SMU-6 FUSE-ST2M62-6 FUSE-ST2M50-6 FUSE-ST2M50L-6 3 mm FUSE-ST3SMU-6 FUSE-ST3M62-6 FUSE-ST3M50-6 FUSE-ST3M50L-6 * is for one pack of 6 pieces ** Laser Optimized MM Fiber (LOMMF) compatible with OM3 and OM4 fibers FUSEConnect Kits ST (blue), SC (green), LC (blue) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

87 FUSEConnect Tool Kit Contents FUSEConnect Tool Kit and Accessories The FUSEConnect tool kit provides all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 900 μm fiber, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL s FUSEConnect Fusion Spliced Field Installable Connectors except for a fusion splicer and precision cleaver. Included in the kit are standard fiber preparation tools and cleaning supplies as well as a FUSEConnect accessory kit and cord splitter tool, which can be bought separately from the tool kit. The cord splitter tool is uniquely designed to open the cordage of 2 mm and 3 mm cable allowing the termination of the ST and FC type connectors on simplex cordage. Applications Premise environments LAN Fiber to the Desk environments Patch panel/wiring closets FTTx applications Quick repair/replacement areas Features Industry standard fiber preparation tools Compact design, flexible yet rugged case FUSEConnect Accessory Kit DESCRIPTION FUSEConnect Tool Kit (includes items below) Tool Case Fiber Stripper Kevlar Scissors Lint-Free Wipes Fiber Preparation Fluid Permanent Marker Cord Splitter Tool FUSEConnect Accessory Kit FUSE-TL-KT CS CS C FM FPF C FUSE-ST-TL FUSE-AC-KT Cord Splitter Tool FUSEConnect Accessory Kit (includes items below) Utility Storage Box Clamp for holding 3 mm Simplex Cordage Clamp for holding 2 mm Simplex Cordage 250 μm / 900 μm Fiber Clamp 3 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder 2 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder 900 μm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp CLAMP-S60D Sheath Clamp (Left side) FUSE-AC-KT CS S S CS S S S S S Cord Splitter Tool FUSE-ST-TL , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

88 Optical Terminators Optical terminators are used to terminate unused connector ports in fiber optic systems so that unwanted reflections are not introduced back into the system. All AFL optical terminators feature zirconia ferrules for long life and durability. Specifications PARAMETER Reflectance Reflectance Operating Temperature Operating Wavelength VALUE <-55 db (ultra polish) <-60 db (angle polish) -40 C to +85 C 1260 nm to 1580 nm DESCRIPTION SC/UP Terminator SC/AP Terminator FC/UP Terminator FC/AP Terminator ST/UP Terminator LC/UP Terminator LC/AP Terminator C C C C C CS CS Fanout Kits Fanout kits route 250 µm fiber into 900 µm tubes ready for connectorization. Easily installed in minutes, these kits require no special tools. Color-coded tubing allows easy identification. The furcation unit snaps together, eliminating epoxy. Loose tube fanout kits are available in 6 and 12 fiber configurations. CABLE TYPE FIBER COUNT LENGTH Loose Tube Fanout Kit (for 3.0 mm tube) 6 Fibers 24 inches C Loose Tube Fanout Kit (for 3.0 mm tube) 12 Fibers 24 inches C Ribbon-Link Fanout Kit 6 Fibers 36 inches C Ribbon-Link Fanout Kit 12 Fibers 36 inches C Uni-Tube Fanout Kit 6 Fibers 36 inches C Uni-Tube Fanout Kit 12 Fibers 36 inches C , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3.0,

89 Duplex Cable Assemblies Zipcord, DUAL-Link and Micro-Dual cables are used to meet the requirements for twofiber cable assemblies, utilizing SC, FC, ST and LC connectors. Features Flexible, 2-fiber design RoHS compliant Riser, Plenum and LSZH rated cables available Cable compliant with Telcordia GR-409 Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326 LC Uniboot cable assemblies for high-density applications Applications Private networks Data centers High-density applications Interconnect and cross-connect Premise installations Cable Components Zipcord DUAL-Link Micro-Dual UST UST RZ 002 Q 0010 Connector End A Single-mode ASC = Angle SC AFC = Angle FC USC = Ultra SC UFC = Ultra FC UST = Ultra ST ULC = Ultra LC USF = Ultra SC Duplex UDL = Ultra LC Duplex Connector End B Single-mode ASC = Angle SC AFC = Angle FC USC = Ultra SC UFC = Ultra FC UST = Ultra ST ULC = Ultra LC USF = Ultra SC Duplex UDL = Ultra LC Duplex XXX = No connector Cable Type Fiber Count RZ = 3.0 mm Riser Zipcord 002 = 2 PZ = 3.0 mm Plenum Zipcord R20Z = 2.0 mm Riser Zipcord P20Z = 2.0 mm Plenum Zipcord R16Z = 1.6 mm Riser Zipcord P16Z = 1.6 mm Plenum Zipcord R20D = 2.0 mm Riser DUAL-LINK P20D = 2.0 mm Plenum DUAL-Link R24D = 2.4 mm Riser DUAL-Link P24D = 2.4 mm Plenum DUAL-Link Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Multimode PSC = SC MM PFC = FC MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PDL = LC Duplex MM Multimode PSC = SC MM PFC = FC MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM PSF = SC Duplex MM PDL = LC Duplex MM XXX = No connector Q = Single-mode ITU-T G.652D X = Single-mode ITU-T G.657A BIF 2 = Multimode 62.5/125 OM1 R = Multimode 50/125 OM2 L = Multimode 50/125 OM3 C = Multimode 50/125 OM4 4 = Corning SMF-28 Ultra XXXX (specify length) 0010 = 10 meters NOTES: 1. Refer to Connector Specifications page. * Single connector options, quantity two per end. Duplex connectors are assembled with removable clip. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

90 Multi-Fiber Cable Assemblies Multi-fiber cable assemblies provide safe and cost effective installation for many applications. These assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance. Featuring a unified construction for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia requirements. Features fibers with aramid yarn reinforcement for rugged protection Available with 900 µm tight buffered fibers or sub-unitized design with µm fibers per tube Highly flexible for ease of routing RoHS compliant Riser, Plenum and LSZH rated cables available Pre-installed pulling eye kits available on certain products Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A/GR-409-CORE Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors Specifications Applications Headend termination to a fiber "backbone" Termination of fiber rack systems Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor Intrabuilding "backbones" Data center systems SINGLE-MODE ASSEMBLIES MULTIMODE ASSEMBLIES LC SC PARAMETER ULTRA ANGLED ULTRA ANGLED LC SC Insertion Loss (Typical db)*** Insertion Loss (Maximum db) Return Loss (Typical db)*** Return Loss (Minimum db) Temperature Range ( C) -40 to +85 *** Typical values based on equal quality connectors. ASC ASC RC 012 Q 0010 NN Connector End A Connector End B Single-mode ASC = Angle SC AFC = Angle FC USC = Ultra SC UFC = Ultra FC UST = Ultra ST ULC = Ultra LC XXX = No connector Cable Type RC = Riser (CPC) PC = Plenum (CPC) PL = Plenum MicroCore Fiber Count Fiber Type Cable Length (meters) Single-mode ASC = Angle SC AFC = Angle FC USC = Ultra SC UFC = Ultra FC UST = Ultra ST ULC = Ultra LC UDL = Ultra LC Duplex* Multimode PSC = SC MM PFC = FC MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM PDL = LC Duplex MM* PSF = SC Duplex MM* * Available on Plenum MicroCore only Multimode PSC = SC MM PFC = FC MM PLC = LC MM PST = ST MM XXX = No connector 004 = = = = = = = = = 144 Q = Single-mode ITU-T G.652D X = Single-mode ITU-T G.657A BIF 2 = Multimode 62.5/125 µm OM1 R = Multimode 50/125 µm OM2 L = Multimode 50/125 µm OM3 C = Multimode 50/125 µm OM4 XXXX (specify length) 0010 = 10 meters Leg Diameter N = 900 µm End A / XXX End B NN = 900 µm End A and B F = Furcated End A / XXX End B FF = Furcated Ends A and B FN = Furcated Ends A / 900 µm End B NF = 900 µm End A / Furcated Ends B NOTES: 1. Refer to Connector Specifications page. 2. Duplex SC and LC available Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

91 LightGuard Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures AFL LightGuard Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to simplify splice management and maintenance. Intuitive engineering design reduces the installation time and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. No heat, adhesives, drills or powered equipment for installation or re-entry are required, just simply use a common 216 can wrench to access and install cable. LightGuard closures are durable, easy-to-install and will increase productivity, reduce labor expenses, and last the life of your plant. Features Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install cables Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Specifications MODEL DESCRIPTION LG-55-U-0 LG-150-U-0 LG-250-U-0 LG-350-U AC LG-350XL-U-0 Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, n/a, n/a 48, 192,48 144, 432, , 1152, , 432, , 2592, 288 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - 1, n/a, n/a 4, 3, n/a 4, 2, 3 12, 8, 8 4, 3, n/a 9, 9, n/a Single, Mass, Mechanical Cable Entrance Configuration In-line / Butt Butt Butt Butt Butt Butt Cable Ports (Express Grommets) 3 (4-Drop Grommets) 5 (7 using dual port grommet Express sides) Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.) 0.70" (splice) 0.62" 0.62" 0.80" 1.00" 1.0" 0.312" Flat or 0.250" Round 1.08" 1.18" Testing - Cable Retention (100 lbs) - Water Resistance (waterhead) - Impact Resistance (0-40 C) - Chemical Resistance - Cable Flexing Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) x 4.00 (35.60 x 10.16) Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed x 8.75 (46.36 x 22.23) Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23) Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed x (71.12 x 25.40) Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed Passed 20 ft. Passed Passed Passed 20 x x (78.74 x 30.48) Weight - lbs. (kg) 3.0 (1.36) 10.5 (4.76) 11.5 (5.23) 14 (6.35) 13 (5.89) 25 (11.34) NOTES: 1. For the LG-250-U-0; 36 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray. 2. For the LG-350-U-0; 108 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

92 Expandable to support various cable diameters Ease of installation (no tapes, washers, or glue) LightGuard Peel and Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures AFL s cable sealing grommet technology for the LightGuard (LG) Sealed Fiber Optic Closures improves sealing technology utilitizing MULTICENTRIC Grommets that do away with time consuming tasks such as installing washers and messy sealing tapes for cable entry. MULTICENTRIC Grommets are designed to accept a wide range of cable diameters, eliminating the need to stock a variety of diameter-specific grommet kits. Conversion kits for old LG-100, LG-200, and LG-300 closures allows for Peel and Seal" grommet technology to be used without changing out the existing closure. Features All Peel and Seal Grommet Systems support loose tube, core tube, dielectric and armored cable designs Installation and re-entry using common hand tools Accepts a wide range of cable diameters Fast and easy to install Fits existing AFL LightGuard sealed closures Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Full conversion kits and dual cable entry port kits Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 & RUS 515 closure requirements Single Dual Quad Multiple layers of sealing protection Ordering information SEALED CLOSURE FULL CONVERSION KITS (SINGLE AXIS CABLE ENTRY) DESCRIPTION 3 Port Drop Grommet (LG-150/250) FC Dual Express Grommets for LG-350 FC Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 FC Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port FC Port Drop Grommet (LG-350 / LG-350-AC) FC LG-350 Express Single Cable Grommet Kit FC LG-350 Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit FC MULTICENTRIC is a registered trademark of the Mar-Don Corporation. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

93 LightGuard 55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure Designed with versatility in mind, the LightGuard (LG) 55 sealed closure from AFL offers a variety of solutions including repair and distribution splicing, grounding for Fiber-in-the-Loop applications, and for use as an isolation gap with armored cables. This closure accepts stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations and can be utilized in a butt or in-line configuration. The LG-55 closure incorporates a unique cable clamp design sealing the cable, allowing both of the cover halves to be removed without disturbing the contents. In addition, AFL s Peel & Seal Grommet System is incorporated to ensure a tight fit on various cable diameters, fully sealing the closure and protecting the fiber while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers making installation fast and easy. Features Accommodates cables to 0.70" O.D. for splicing and grounding/bonding Incorporates the Peel and Seal Grommet System, fully sealing the closure Includes removable, integral central splicing module and individual cable retention clamps Requires only a common can wrench for installation Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, n/a, 24 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 1, n/a, 1 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or In-line Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) Double Express Port Only in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.40" " ( ) 0.26" " ( ) Additional Grommets Quad Express Port Only in. (mm) 0.26" " ( ) Dimensions (L x D) in. (mm) 14.0" x 4.0" (343.0 x 101.6) Weight lbs. (kg) 3.0 (1.36) In-line Repair Closure (IRC) for repair of flat or round drop cables DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-55 FC PS Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores up to 32 single LG55-U-1 FC PS fusion, includes 2 single cable grommets and 1 dual cable grommet kit for sealing/retention and 2 ground terminals. Splice tray and hanger brackets included. Not included: Cable Grounding Kits LL-2425 Single Splice Tray Stores (32) single fusion splices. LL-2425 FC Maximum of 1 trays in the LG55. Tray Included. LG-350 Single Grommet Kit (Min. 0.40" - Max. 1.00") LG-350 Exp FC For use in LG-55 on Express Port side. Single Kit LG-350 Dual Grommet Kit (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.44") For use in LG-55 on Express Port side. LG-350 Exp Dual Kit FC LG-350 Quad Grommet Kit (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.38") LG-350 Exp Quad Kit FC For use in LG-55 on Express Port side. LG-55 Grommet Kit (1) 3 flat drop grommet (flat drop 0.31" or round LG-55 Drop Kit FC cable up to 0.25") and (1) dual grommet (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.44"). Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 9,

94 LightGuard 55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure AFL s LightGuard (LG) 55-SC sealed closure retains all the features of the LG-55, but includes a unique patching system that utilizes pre-terminated SC fiber assemblies or field installable connectors such as the FASTConnect SC. An innovative solution that can be used to facilitate a link between traffic control cabinets and entrance cables, the LG-55-SC closure allows for rapid restoration and minimal damage to a fiber optic cable should an impact disable the cabinet. A breakable tie wrap secures the pre-connectorized cable to one side of the closure (traffic control cabinet), while the main entrance cable is secured with a more rugged cable clamp, allowing the system to separate during a damaging impact. Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) 0.4" - 0.7" Maximum Cable Entry 2 ports (one each end) Dimensions - (L x D) in. (mm) 14" x 4" (356.0 mm x mm) Features Durable cover assembly that provides protection for all internal components and acts as an interface / anchor to the cable clamps Unique cable clamp seal to anchor the cable to the cover assembly Movable sheath retention bracket keeps cable bends at a minimum Accommodates up to four SC/UPC connectors Utilizes AFL s Peel & Seal Grommet System, ensuring a tight fit on various cable diameters while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers Requires only a common can wrench for installation DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. The LG55-SC allows for 4 SC connectionsto be installed. A FASTConnect or LG-55-SC FC PS FUSEConnect, filed installable connectors would be used for the connections. The field side cable is held with a tie-wrap while the signal side is secured to the closure with a hose clamp. This allows for a break-out should a vehicle make contact with a traffic box leaving the signal side cable intact. Dual Cable Entry Port Kit - Allows two cables to enter closure from Dual Cable FC each cable port. Entry Port Kit Quad Cable Entry Port Kits - Allows 4 cables to enter closure from Quad Cable FC each cable port Entry Port Kit Cable Grounding Harness Kit - Includes (5) Clamp-On 9.5" long ground wires AWG #6 conductor CGK-5 FC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

95 LightGuard 150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 150 is a sealed dome closure designed for small count fiber splicing (up to 48 single or 192 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-150 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Features Supports stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 48, 192, 48 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 4, 3, 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cables 5 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.26" " ( ) Additional Grommets (3) Flat Drop Port Only in. (mm) n/a (3) Drop Ports 0.26" " ( ) Dimensions (L x D) in. (mm) 18.25" x 8.75" (463.6 x 222.3) Weight lbs. (kg) 10.5 (4.76) 0.19" x 0.34" (4.8 x 8.6) or 0.25" round (6.4) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-150 Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 48 single fusion or 192 mass fusion, includes (5) cable kits LG-150-U-0 FC PS for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond. Not included: Splice Trays, Cable Grounding Kits or Hanger Brackets LL-2450 Single Splice Tray Stores (12) single fusion splices. Maximum of 4 trays in the LG150 LL LL-4850 Mass Splice Tray Stores (8) mass fusion splices (96 F). Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-150 LL LL-1248 Universal Splice Tray Stores (12) single fusion splices or (8) mass fusion splices (96 F), or LL *Mechanical. Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-150. LG-150/250 Single Grommet Kit (Min Max ) LG-150/250 Single Kit FC LG-150/250 3 Flat Drop Grommet Kit (standard flat drop 0.31 or round cable up to 0.25 ) LG-150/250 Drop Kit FC Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Universal Hanger FC Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Hanger FC Pole or Wall Mount Bracket For use with LG-150/250/350 PWK FC OPGW Dual Cable Bracket Kit for use only when installing closure on OPGW cable For use with LG-150/250/350 OPGW Dual Bracket FC OPGW Quad Cable Bracket Kit For use with LG-150/250 LG-150/250 OPGW Quad Bracket Sealed FC x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures Sealed Closure Stand FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds VHB Tape FA splices. O-Ring and Lock Ring Kit For use with LG-150/250 LG-150/250 Lock Ring Kit FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 9,

96 LightGuard 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 250 is a sealed dome closure designed for medium count fiber splicing (up to 144 single or 432 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-250 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Features Supports stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 144, 432, 48 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 4, 3, 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports 5 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.26" " ( ) Additional Grommets (3) Flat Drop Port Only in. (mm) n/a (3) Drop Ports 0.26" " ( ) Dimensions (L x D) in. (mm) 18.25" x 8.75" (463.6 x 222.3) Weight lbs. (kg) 10.5 (4.76) 0.19" x 0.34" (4.8 x 8.6) or 0.25" round (6.4) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-250 Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 144 single fusion or 432 mass fusion, includes (5) cable kits for LG-250-U-0 FC PS sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond. Not included: Splice Trays, Cable Grounding Kits or Hanger Brackets LL-2400 Single Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion splices. Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-250. LL LL-2448 Universal Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices (48 F). Maximum of 3 trays LL in the LG-250 LL-4848 Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-250 LL LL S Single Splice Tray Stores (48) single fusion splices. Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-250 LL S FA LG-150/250 Single Grommet Kit (Min Max ) LG-150/250 Single Kit FC LG-150/250 3 Flat Drop Grommet Kit (standard flat drop 0.31 or round cable up to 0.25 ) LG-150/250 Drop Kit FC Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Universal Hanger FC Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Hanger FC Pole or Wall Mount Bracket For use with LG-150/250/350 PWK FC OPGW Dual Cable Bracket Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 OPGW Dual Bracket FC OPGW Quad Cable Bracket Kit For use with LG-150/250 LG-150/250 OPGW Quad Bracket Sealed FC x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures Sealed Closure Stand FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA O-Ring and Lock Ring Kit For use with LG-150/250 LG-150/250 Lock Ring Kit FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

97 MuxGuard 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The MuxGuard 250 is a sealed dome closure designed with pre-installed Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDMs or DWDMs that allow for MUXing and DEMUXing within the same closure. The closure is also equipped with pre-installed splice trays that keep the bandwidth signals separated from each other, thus preventing accidental signal loss during maintenance activities. All fibers from the WDMs are routed to the appropriate splice tray through color-coded transition tubes. The closures are available with 4-channel or 8-channel units. As with other LG Series Sealed Closures, these closures require no tools for re-entry, and each closure may be padlocked as necessary. Specifications Features Factory pre-installed devices Factory pre-installed transition tubes with fibers routed to appropriately designated bandwidth splice trays Color-coded transition tubes Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber, splices and devices Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single 96 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cable Ports 5 Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.) 5 (0.70" ") Dimensions (L x D) in. (mm) 19 x 8.75 (482.6 x 222.3) Weight lbs. (kg) 11.5 (5.23) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. MuxGuard 250 Sealed Closure LG-250-CWDM ( ) LG-250-CWDM FC FC LL-2448 Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or LL (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC O-Ring Replacement Kit For use with LG-150/250 O-Ring Replacement FC Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use Universal Hanger FC with LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use with Extended Offset Hanger FC LG-150/250/350 Pole or Wall Mount Bracket For use with PWK FC LG-150/250/350 Terminal Adapter Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-150/250 LLAS SC FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

98 CWDM 4-Channel Mini Module Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM AFL s TFF compact series CWDM modules deliver reliable performance and flexibility in every network application from cellular backhaul and metro Ethernet to access and security. With its reduced package size, this new outside plant CWDM module has added flexibility, making deployment options more convenient. This CWDM series is based on proven Thin Film Filter technology, offering low insertion loss and high thermal stability over the entire outside plant operating temperature range. Numerous configurations are available to meet unique needs and support new or existing network architectures. Typical options include a variety of configurations (mux, demux, and balanced), upgrade ports (1310, C-Band, and others), test / monitoring ports and multiple termination options. CWDM 8-Channel Mini Module Features Low insertion loss Compact size High thermal stability Telcordia GR-1221-CORE compliant RoHS 6/6 compliant Applications CWDM systems Metro ethernet / access networks Cellular backhaul networks Specifications WITHOUT UPGRADE PORT WITH 1310 NM UPGRADE PORT PARAMETER UNIT 4 Channel 8 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel Operating Wavelength nm 1471~1611 Channel Spacing nm 20 Center Wavelength nm Customer specified Pass Band nm ± Upgrade Port Pass Band nm 1270~ Upgrade Port Insertion Loss db 1.0 CWDM Channel Insertion Loss db CWDM Adjacent Channel Isolation db 30 CWDM Non-adjacent Channel db 45 Isolation PDL db 0.2 PMD ps Return Loss db 45 Directivity db 50 Maximum Input Power mw 300 Package Size Mm 60 (l) x 35 (w) x 6 (d) 70 (l) x 45 (w) x 9 (d) Operating Temperature C -40 ~ +85 * Actual optical specifications will vary based on product configuration 1. Higher and lower channel counts available LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

99 LightGuard 350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 350 is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing (up to 480 single or 1152 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350 is ideal for express, ring or long haul applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Supports stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 480, 1152, 108 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 12, 8, 8 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cables 5 to 11 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.40" " ( ) Additional Grommets Dual Express Port Only in. (mm) Quad Express Port Only in. (mm) 0.26" " ( ) 0.26" " ( ) (3) Drop Ports 0.26" " ( ) (4) Flat Drop Port Only in. (mm) 0.19" x 0.34" (4.8 x 8.6) or 0.25" round (6.4) Dimensions (L x D) in. (mm) 28.0" x 10.0" (710.0 x 254.0) Weight - lbs. (kg) 16 (7.26) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-350 Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 480 single fusion or 1152 mass fusion, includes (5) cable kits for sealing/retention LG-350-U-0 FC PS and (2) ground terminals with removable bond. Not included: Splice Trays, Cable Grounding Kits or Hanger Brackets LL-2400 Single Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion splices. Maximum of 12 trays in the LG-350 LL LL-2448 Universal Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices (48 F). LL Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-350 LL-4848 Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-350 LL LL S Single Splice Tray Stores (48) single fusion splices. Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-350 LL S FA LL-4896 Universal Splice Tray Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) mass fusion splices (288 F). LL Maximum of 5 trays in the LG-350 LL-4896-R Mass Splice Tray Stores (24) mass fusion splices (288 F). Maximum of 5 trays in the LG-350 LL-4896-R FA LL-4896-L Single Splice Tray Stores (96) single fusion splices. Maximum of 5 trays in the LG-350 LL-4896-L FA LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray Stores (60) single fusion or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both LL-7644 FA in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray For use with LG-350SD LL-7060 Splice Tray Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray For use in LG-350 LL-7060 FA LL-7144 Splice Tray Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray For use in LG-350 LL-7144 FA LG-350 Single Grommet Kit (Min. 0.40" - Max. 1.00") For use in LG-350/AC/SD on Express Port side LG-350 Exp Single Kit FC LG-350 Dual Grommet Kit (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.44") For use in LG-350/AC/SD on Express Port side LG-350 Exp Dual Kit FC LG-350 Quad Grommet Kit (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.38") For use in LG-350/AC/SD on Express Port side LG-350 Exp Quad Kit FC LG-350 Single Grommet Kit (Min. 0.26" - Max. 0.80") For use in LG-350/AC/SD on Drop Port side LG-350 Drop Single Kit FC LG-350 Drop 4 Flat Drop Grommet Kit For use with standard flat drop cable and round cable up to 0.25" O.D. LG-350 Drop 4 Flat Kit FC Single Cable Grommet Kit for drop side of closures Use as a replacement Single Cable Grommet Kit FC Dual Express Grommet Kit Use to increase cable numbers for up to 7 cables Dual Express Cable Grommet Kit FC Quad Express Grommet Kit Use to increase cable numbers for up to 11 cables Quad Express Cable Grommet Kit FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. Micro Duct Grommets available. Please call Customer Service for details. continued on next page , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

100 LightGuard 350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure 4-Drop Cable Grommet Kit Use on drop side of closures for distributing flat drop cables 4 Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Universal Hanger FC Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Hanger FC Pole or Wall Mount Bracket For use with LG-150/250/350 PWK FC OPGW Dual Cable Bracket Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 OPGW Dual Bracket FC OPGW Quad Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures For use with LG-350 LG-350 OPGW Quad Bracket Sealed FC x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA O-Ring and Lock Ring Kit For use with LG-350/350AC/SD LG-350 O-Ring Lock Ring Kit FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications. Micro Duct Grommets available. Please call Customer Service for details , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

101 LightGuard 350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 350-AC is a sealed dome closure designed for medium count fiber splicing (up to 144 single or 432 mass) in a butt configuration where space may be limited. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350-AC is designed for "drop access" applications providing access for up to 12 drops. The LG-350-AC is ideal for for Fiber-to-the-Home installations in small hand-hole application and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 144, 432, 48 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical* 4, 3, 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cables 2 to 8 Express with up to 12 Drop Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets (3) Drop Ports Single in. (mm) (4) Flat Drop Only in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Express Port Only in. (mm) Quad Express Port Only in. (mm) (4) Flat Drop Port Only in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.40" " ( ) 0.26" " ( ) 0.26" " ( ) Dimensions - (L x D) in. (mm) 19.8" x 10.0" (503.0 x 254.0) Weight - lbs. (kg) 12.0 (5.44) (4 port) 0.26" " ( ) 0.19" x 0.34" (4.8 x 8.6) or 0.25" round (6.4) Features Less than 20" overall length; ideal for small hand-holes Supports stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install two cables and up to 12 drops Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) listed DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-350-AC Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 144 single fusion LG-350-AC FC or 432 mass fusion, includes (2) Express cable kits and (12) Drop cable kits for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond. Included: (1) LL-4808L Splice Tray Not included: Cable Grounding Kits, or Hanger Brackets LL-4808L-R Universal Splice Tray Stores (36) single fusion splices or (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-350-AC. LL-4808L-R FA LL-4808-R Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). LL-4808-R FA Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-350-AC LL-4808-L Single Splice Tray Stores (36) single fusion splices. Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-350-AC LL-4808-L FA continued on next page Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

102 LightGuard 350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-350 Single Grommet Kit (Min Max ) For use in LG-350 Exp Single Kit FC LG-55/LG-350/LG-350-AC on Express Port side LG-350 Dual Grommet Kit (Min Max ) For use in LG-350 Exp Dual Kit FC LG-55/LG-350/LG-350-AC on Express Port side LG-350 Quad Grommet Kit (Min Max ) For use in LG-350 Exp Quad Kit FC LG-55/LG-350/LG-350-AC on Express Port side LG-350 Single Grommet Kit (Min Max ) For use in LG-350 Drop Single Kit FC LG-350/AC/SD on Drop Port side LG-350-AC Single Grommet Kit (Min Max ) with LG-350-AC Drop FC retention hardware For use in LG-350-AC on Drop Port side Single Kit LG-350 Drop 4 Flat Drop Grommet Kit For use with standard flat LG-350 Drop 4 Flat Kit FC drop cable and round cable up to 0.25 O.D. Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Universal Hanger FC Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 Extended Offset Hanger FC Pole or Wall Mount Bracket For use with LG-150/250/350 PWK FC OPGW Dual Cable Bracket Kit For use with LG-150/250/350 OPGW Dual Bracket FC Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures (LG-150, LG-250, LG-350, Sealed Closure Stand FC LG-350-AC, LG-350-SD, LG-350XL) 1x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. VHB Tape FA Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. O-Ring and Lock Ring Kit For use with LG-350/AC/SD LG-350 O-Ring Lock Ring Kit FC * See Accessory Specifications. See Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

103 LightGuard 350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 350XL is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing (up to 864 single or 2592 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350XL is ideal for high fiber count splicing and requires only a common can wrench for installation. A Phillips head screw is used to secure the tray support to the basket. Specifications Features Supports stranded loose tube or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables Accommodates up to 7 cables Oversized basket allows multiple configurations of slack storage O-Ring and Locking Ring for increased protection Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 864, 2592, 288 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 9, 9, 9 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt Cables 5 to 7 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Exp. Port Only in. (mm) (2) Express Ports 0.40" " ( ) 0.38" " ( ) Dimensions - (L x D) in. (mm) 31.0" x 12.00" (788.5 x 305.0) Weight - lbs. (kg) 25.0 (11.3) (3) Drop Ports 0.30" " ( ) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-350XL Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 864 single fusion or 2592 mass LG-350XL-U-0 FC PS fusion, includes (5) cable kits for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond. Not included: Splice Trays, Cable Grounding Kits or Hanger Brackets LL-4896 Universal Splice Tray Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) mass LL fusion splices (288 F), *Mechanical. Maximum of 9 trays in the LG-350XL LL-4896-R Mass Splice Tray Stores (24) mass fusion splices (288 F). LL-4896-R FA Maximum of 9 trays in the LG-350XL LL-4896-L Single Splice Tray Stores (96) single fusion splices. LL-4896-L FA Maximum of 9 trays in the LG-350XL LG-350XL Single Grommet Kit (Min. 0.40" - Max. 1.18") For use in LG-350XL FC LG-350XL on Express Port side Exp Single Kit LG-350XL Dual Grommet Kit (Min. 0.38" - Max. 0.56") For use in LG-350XL FC LG-350XL on Express Port side Exp Dual Kit LG-350XL Single Grommet Kit (Min. 0.30" - Max. 1.08") For use in LG-350XL FC LG-350XL on Drop Port side Drop Single Kit Strand Mount Hanger Bracket For use with LG-350XL in strand or XL Hanger vault mounting Bracket Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures Sealed Closure FC Stand 1x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. VHB Tape FA Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. O-Ring and Lock Ring Kit For use with LG-350XL LG-350XL FC O-Ring Lock Ring Kit Transition tubing 16.25" long Used to transport ribbon to the splice trays. (20) per kit Transition Tubes FC * See LL-4896 Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 11,

104 LightGuard Sealed Splice Closure Accessories Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures Table top closure stand to be used for the LG-150/250/350/350XL closures. Can be clamped or permanently fastened to a table top to hold the closure in place during installation or maintenance. The clamp pivots 180 to allow accessibility to both sides of the frame and all cable entry ports. DESCRIPTION Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures FC Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL Used on the express side of the LG-350XL closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. Minimum cable diameter is 0.380" ". DESCRIPTION Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL FC Dual Express Grommets Dual and Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 Used on the express side of the LG-350 closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. A 4-drop flat grommet may be used if drops are also required. Cable diameter for dual grommets is 0.26" "; for quad, 0.24" ". Quad Express Grommets DESCRIPTION Dual Express Grommets for LG-350 Quad Express Grommets for LG-350 FC FC Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC Used with the LG-350 and LG-350-AC Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit and install standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.25" in diameter. DESCRIPTION 4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC FC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

105 LightGuard Sealed Splice Closure Accessories (cont.) Single Cable and 3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-150/LG-250 Used with the LG-150 and LG-250 Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit. Both closures will accept standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.250" in diameter. DESCRIPTION Single Cable Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250 FC FC Single Cable Grommet Kits for LG-350-AC and LG-350 Used with the LG-350-AC when a branch cable is required with the drop cables. May also be used for with the LG-350 as replacement grommets. Simply remove the flat drop grommet and replace with the single cable grommets. DESCRIPTION Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port for LG-350-AC FC Express Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350 FC Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350 FC OPGW Cable Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 Attaches to the outer grounding studs of the LG-150/LG-250 or LG-350 Sealed Closures. Stainless steel hose clamps secure the OPGW cable to the bracket preventing twisting or movement. DESCRIPTION OPGW Cable Bracket for the LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 for 2 cables. OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures (LG-150/LG-250) to 4 OPGW Cables. OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures (LG-350) to 4 OPGW Cables. FC FC FC Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC to secure the closures onto poles or walls in a vertical orientation. Slots on the brackets allow for strapping onto steel or cement poles. DESCRIPTION Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC FC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

106 LightGuard Sealed Splice Closure Accessories (cont.) Universal Aerial Bracket and Extended Offset Bracket Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC for mounting on aerial or messengers. DESCRIPTION Universal Aerial Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC Extended Offset Bracket FC FC Strand Mount Hanger Bracket for LG-350XL Used with the LG-350XL. DESCRIPTION Strand Mount Hanger Bracket For use with LG-350XL Cable Ground Kits Used with the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350. DESCRIPTION Cable Grounding Kit Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350. Cable Grounding Harness Kit Includes (4) 8" ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350. FC FC FC O-Ring Replacement Kits Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350XL. DESCRIPTION O-Ring Replacement Kit For use with LG-150/250 FC O-Ring Replacement Kit For use with LG-300XL FC O-Ring Replacement Kit For use with LG x6 Cable Router Kit Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC. Enlarged to show detail 1X6 Cable Router Kit DESCRIPTION FC , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

107 LightGuard Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures The AFL family of Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures is designed to provide a cost-effective solution for your aerial splicing needs. Quality engineering reduces the installation time, training and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. The closures have all been designed to be installed without the need for special tools, heat, adhesives, drills or any powered equipment. Durable and easy to install, these closures will improve productivity, reduce labor expenses and last the life of the plant. Features Individual, patented, self-sizing cable grommets and strength member tie downs provide for cable additions without disturbing those previously installed Unique tongue-in-groove closure seal and back-to-back grommet design provides for a weathertight and insect seal Closures are re-enterable without the need for any re-entry kits and require only a common can wrench for installation Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 aerial weathertight closure requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Specifications PARAMETER LG-410-U-0 LG-420-U-0 LG-500-U-0 LG-600-U-0 Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, 144, 432, 36 12, 48, , 432, , 1152, 96 Mechanical Splice Tray Capacity - Single, Mass 4, 2 n/a, n/a 4, 2 12, 8, 8 Cable Ports (3 per end) Cable Entrance In-line, Butt In-line (taut sheath) In-line, Butt In-line, Butt Cable Sizes (O.D.) " " " " CLOSURE TEST 1, 2 Cable Retention (100 lbs.) Impact Resistance (0-40 C) Chemical Resistance Cable Flexing Dust (Weather Tightness) Driving Rain Rodent Test Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (cm) Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits " " Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x x 10.16) Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits " " Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x x 10.16) Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits " " Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed x 8.25 x 4.00 (68.58 x x 10.16) Up to 12 with Dual Grommet Kits " " Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed x x 7.50 (68.58 x x 19.05) Weight lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.86) 8.5 (3.86) 6.4 (2.90) 18 (8.16) Note 1: Tested to Telcordia GR-771-Core and Aerial Strand requirements Note 2: Not all Telcordia tests are listed due to space constraints; All closures are designed and tested to appropriate aerial test requirements Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

108 LightGuard 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for medium count fiber splicing (up to 144 single or 432 mass) in a butt or in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-410 provides additional fiber bundle storage with its extended length design and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to eight cable entrances) Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 144, 432, 36 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 4, 3,4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or In-line Cables 4 to 8 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) (4) Cable Ports 0.38" " ( ) 0.27" to 0.53" - LG: 0.38" to 0.70" ( / ) 0.20" " ( ) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 36.0" x 8.0" x 4.0" (914.0 x x 102.0) Weight - lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.81) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 144 LG-410-U-0 FC single fusion or 432 mass fusion, includes (4) cable kits for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond, and hanger brackets. Not included: Splice Trays or Cable Grounding Kits LL-2400 Single Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion splices. LL Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-410. LL-2448 Universal Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass LL fusion splices (48 F). Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-410. LL-4848 Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). LL Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-410. LL S Single Splice Tray Stores (48) single fusion splices. LL S FA Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-410. Small Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Small Single (Min 0.38"- Max 0.82") Grommet Kit (10) Small Dual Grommet Kit Includes: (2) small dual grommets Small Dual and hardware (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min 0.38" - Max 0.70") Grommet Kit Small Dual Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Small Dual (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min 0.38" - Max 0.70") Grommet Kit (10) Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 2 grommets with tie wrap and foam Allows six cable entries (Min 0.20"- Max 0.365" and flat drop) Small 6 Port Drop Kit FC continued on next page Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

109 LightGuard 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Large Single Grommet Kit with retention hardware Large Single FC (Min 0.44"- Max 1.04") Grommet Kit Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit (10 pc grommet only) Small Drop FC (Min 0.20"- Max 0.365" and flat drop) Grommet Kit (10) Large Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Large Single (Min 0.44" - Max 1.04") Grommet Kit (10) Large Dual Grommet Expansion Kit Includes: (2) Dual grommets and Large Dual hardware (Min.40"-Max.70" and Min 0.60"- Max 0.90") Grommet Kit Large 6 Port Drop Cable Kit 2 Grommets with retention bracket. Large 6 Port FC Allows six cable entries (Min 0.23"- Max 0.48" and flat drop) Drop Kit Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/600 Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware Cable Retention Kit FC LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) LG-400\500\600 Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended Closure Extension Kit sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers LG-400/500/600 1x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes. 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all VHB Tape FA splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

110 LightGuard 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for taut sheath (no slack) splicing (up to 24 single or 48 mass) in an in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-420 is ideal for repairing cable sheath or fibers, providing mid-span access and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to eight cable entrances) Taut Sheath splice module accommodates up to twelve fusion splices Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, 48, 12 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* Splice chips for 24F single fusion splice included Cable Entrance Configuration In-line (taut sheath) Cables 4 to 8 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single Exp in. (mm) (4) Cable Ports 0.38" " ( ) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) Sm: 0.27" to 0.53" - LG: 0.38" to 0.70" ( / ) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) 0.20" " ( ) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 36.0" x 8.0" x 4.0" (914.0 x x 102.0) Weight lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.81) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 12 single LG-420-U-0 FC fusion or 48 mass fusion, includes (4) cable kits for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond, splice chips and hanger brackets. Not included: Cable Grounding Kits Small Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Small Single (Min 0.38"- Max 0.82") Grommet Kit (10) Small Dual Grommet Kit Includes: (2) small dual grommets Small Dual and hardware (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min Max 0.70") Grommet Kit Small Dual Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Small Dual (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min Max 0.70") Grommet Kit (10) Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 2 grommets with tie wrap and foam. Small 6 Port FC Allows six cable entries (Min 0.20"- Max 0.365" and flat drop) Drop Kit Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/ Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) Cable Retention Kit FC LG-400/500/600 Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for extended Closure sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Extension Kit LG-400/500/600 1x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 9,

111 LightGuard 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for taut sheath (no slack) splicing (up to 32 single) in an in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-420-FTTx is ideal for FTTx access networks by providing access for up to 12 drop cables and 16 connections, requiring only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports: - 2 express ports - 2 multi-drop ports 12 drop cables and 16 connections Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention Special lock-out interior enclosure Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 32, n/a, 12 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 1, n/a, 1 Cable Entrance Configuration In-line (taut sheath) Cables 2 to 4 Express with up to 12 Drop (4) Cable Ports 0.38" " ( ) 2 (6 0.20" " ( ) Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) Sm: 0.27" to 0.53" - LG: 0.38" to 0.70" ( / ) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) 0.20" " ( ) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 36.0" x 8.0" x 4.0" (914.0 x x 102.0) Weight lbs. (kg) 8.5 (3.81) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. The AFL LiightGuard (LG) 420 FTTx FC Aerial Weathertight LG-420-U-FTTx FC Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow taut sheath (no slack) or conventional splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks. The LG-420 FTTx provides access for 1 to 16 connections and up to 12 subscriber drops and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Not included: Cable Grounding Kits. Includes: Hanger Brackets and Splice Tray. LL-2425 Single Splice Tray Stores (32) single fusion splices. LL-2425 FC Maximum of 1 tray in the LG-420-FTTx. Small Single Grommet Kit of (10 pc grommet only) Small Single (Min.38"- Max.82") Grommet Kit (10) Small Dual Grommet Kit Includes: (2) small dual grommets and hardware (Min.27"- Max.53" and Min.38" - Max.70") Small Dual Grommet Kit Small Dual Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) (Min.27"- Max.53" and Min.38" - Max.70") Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 2 grommets with tie wrap and foam. Allows six cable entries (Min 0.20"- Max 0.365" and flat drop) Small Dual Grommet Kit (10) Small 6 Port Drop Kit FC continued on next page LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

112 LightGuard 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/600 Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) Cable Retention Kit LG-400/500/600 FC Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Closure Extension Kit LG-400/500/ x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes. 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA * See Accessory Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

113 LightGuard 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for medium count fiber splicing (up to 144 single or 432 mass) in a butt or in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-500 is ideal for congested aerial construction due to its compact design and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 144, 432, 36 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 4, 3, 4 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or In-line Cables 4 to 8 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. - Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) (4) Cable Ports 0.38" " ( ) 0.27" to 0.53" - LG: 0.38" to 0.70" ( / ) 0.20" " ( ) Features Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable up to eight cable entrances) Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 27.0 x 8.3 x 4.0 (686.0 x x 100.0) Weight lbs. (kg) 6.4 (2.90) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 144 LG-500-U-0 FC single fusion or 432 mass fusion, includes (4) cable kits for sealing/ retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond, and hanger brackets. Not included: Splice Trays or Cable Grounding Kits LL-2400 Single Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion splices. LL Maximum of 4 trays in the LG-500. LL-2448 Universal Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass LL fusion splices (48 F), *Mechanical. Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-500. LL-4848 Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). LL Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-500. LL S Single Splice Tray Stores (48) single fusion splices. Maximum of 3 trays in the LG-500. LL S FA Small Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) (Min 0.38"- Max 0.82") Small Dual Grommet Kit Includes: (2) small dual grommets and hardware (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min 0.38" - Max 0.70") Small Dual Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min Max 0.70") Small Single Grommet Kit (10) Small Dual Grommet Kit Small Dual Grommet Kit (10) Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. continued on next page , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

114 LightGuard 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 2 grommets with tie wrap and foam Allows six cable entries (Min 0.20"- Max 0.365" and flat drop) Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit for LG-400/500/600 Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Small 6 Port Drop Kit Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/600 Cable Retention Kit LG 400/500/600 Closure Extension Kit LG-400/500/600 FC FC x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes. 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp -On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

115 LightGuard 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures The LightGuard (LG) 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small count fiber splicing (up to 32 single or 48 mass) in a butt or in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-500-FTTx is ideal for FTTx access networks by providing cable entry and connectivity for up to 12 drop cables and 16 connections, requiring only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports: - 2 express ports - 2 multi-drop ports 12 drop cables and 16 connections Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention Special lock-out interior enclosure Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS)-listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 32, 48, 12 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechancial* 1, 1, 1 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or In-line Cables 2 to 4 Express with up to 12 Drop (4) Cable Ports 0.38" " ( ) 2 (6 0.20" " ( ) Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) Sm: 0.27" to 0.53" - LG: 0.38" to 0.70" ( / ) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) 0.20" " ( ) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 27.0 x 8.3 x 4.0 (686.0 x x 100.0) Weight lbs. (kg) 10.1 (4.58) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-500-FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores LG-500-FTTx FC single fusion or 48 mass fusion, includes (4) cable kits for sealing/ retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond, (1) splice tray, and hanger brackets. Not included: Cable Grounding Kits LL-2425 Single Splice Tray Stores (32) single fusion splices. LL-2425 FC Maximum of 1 tray in the LG-500-FTTx. Small Single Grommet Kit of (10 pc grommet only) (Min 0.38"- Max 0.82") Small Single Grommet Kit (10) Small Dual Grommet Kit Includes: (2) small dual grommets and hardware (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min 0.38" - Max 0.70") Small Dual Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) (Min 0.27"- Max 0.53" and Min 0.38" - Max 0.70") Small 6-Port Drop Cable Kit 2 grommets with tie wrap and foam tape. Allows six cable entries (Min 0.20"- Max 0.37" and flat drop) Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Small Dual Grommet Kit Small Dual Grommet Kit (10) Small 6 Port Drop Kit Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/ FC continued on next page LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

116 LightGuard 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures (cont.) (cont.) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) Cable Retention Kit LG-400/500/600 FC Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Closure Extension Kit LG-400/500/ x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes. 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp -On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 6,

117 LightGuard 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for high count fiber splicing (up to 384 single or 1152 mass) in a butt or in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-600 is an ideal cost-effective solution for high fiber count splicing and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 384, 1152, 36 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 12, 8, 8 Cable Entrance Configuration Butt or In-line Cables 6 to 24 Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) (6) Cable Ports 0.44" " ( ) Sm: 040" to 0.70" - LG: 0.60" " ( / ) 0.30" " ( ) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 27.0" x 11.3" x 7.5" (690.0 x x 190.5) Weight lbs. (kg) 18.0 (8.16) Features Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to twelve cable entrances) Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure Stores 384 LG-600-U-0 FC single fusion or 1152 mass fusion, includes (4) cable kits for sealing/ retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond and hanger brackets. Not included: Splice Trays or Cable Grounding Kits LL-2400 Single Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion splices. LL Maximum of 12 trays in the LG-600. LL-2448 Universal Splice Tray Stores (24) single fusion or (4) LL mass fusion splices (48 F). Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-600, *Mechanical LL-4848 Mass Splice Tray Stores (12) mass fusion splices (144 F). LL Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-600 LL S Single Splice Tray Stores (48) single fusion splices. LL S FA Maximum of 8 trays in the LG-600 Large Single Grommet Kit with retention hardware Large Single FC (Min 0.44"- Max 1.00") Grommet Kit Large Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) Large Single (Min 0.44"- Max 1.00") Grommet Kit (10) Large Dual Grommet Expansion Kit Includes: (2) Dual grommets Large Dual and hardware (Min 0.40"- Max 0.70" and Min 0.60"- Max 0.90") Grommet Kit Large 6 Port Drop Cable Kit 2 Grommets with retention bracket. Large 6 Port Drop Kit FC Allows six cable entries (Min 0.23"- Max 0.48" and flat drop) Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/ continued on next page Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

118 LightGuard 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/600 SC adapter bracket for LG 600 Bulkheads not included Adapter Bracket FM (2 brackets per closure max) (6 empty SC) LG-600 Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement Cable Retention Kit FC hardware LG-400/500/600 (no grommets) LG-400/500/600 Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for Closure Extension Kit extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers LG-400/500/600 1x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp -On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. VHB Tape FA * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

119 LightGuard 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure The LightGuard (LG) 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small count fiber splicing (up to 48 single or 48 mass) in a butt or in-line configuration. Utilized in aerial applications, the LG-600-FTTx is ideal for express slack look fiber access splicing by providing cable entry and connectivity for up to 24 subscriber drops and requires only a common can wrench for installation. Specifications Features Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports: - 2 express ports - 4 multi-drop ports Up to 12 adapters using the LG-600 expansion kit and SC 6-pack adapter brackets Special multi-drop grommets and cable retention Integrated aerial splicing work tray Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system Installation and re-entry only require a common can wrench Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and UV resistance requirements Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed PARAMETER VALUE Splice Capacity (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, 48, 24 Number of Splice Trays (Max.) Single, Mass, Mechanical* 2, 2, 2 Cable Entrance Configuration Cable Ports Cable Sizes (Min. O.D. Max. O.D.) Included Grommets Single in. (mm) 6-Port Multi-Drop Grommet in. (mm) Additional Grommets Dual Grommet in. (mm) Butt or In-line 2 to 4 Express with up to 24 Drops (6) Cable Ports 0.44" " ( ) 0.30" " ( ) Sm: 040" to 0.70" - LG: 0.60" " ( / ) Dimensions (L x W x D) in. (mm) 27.00" x 11.25" x 7.50" (690.0 x x 190.5) Weight lbs. (kg) 18.0 (8.16) DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-600-FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure LG600-FTTx FC Stores 24 single fusion or 48 mass fusion, includes (6) cable kits for sealing/retention and (2) ground terminals with removable bond, (2) splice tray, and hanger brackets. Not included: Cable Grounding Kits LL-2450 Single Splice Tray Stores (12) single fusion splices. LL Maximum of (2) trays in the LG-600-FTTx. LL-4850 Mass Splice Tray Stores (8) mass fusion splices (96 F). LL Maximum of (2) trays in the LG-600-FTTx. LL-1248 Universal Splice Tray Stores (12) single fusion splices or (8) LL mass fusion splices (96 F), *Mechanical. Maximum of 2 trays in the LG-600FTTx. Large Single Grommet Kit with retention hardware (Min 0.44"- Max 1.00") Large Single Grommet Kit FC Large Single Grommet Kit (10 pc grommet only) (Min 0.44"- Max 1.00") Large Dual Grommet Expansion Kit Includes: (2) Dual grommets and hardware (Min 0.40" - Max 0.70" and Min 0.60" - Max 0.90") Large 6 Port Drop Cable Kit 2 Grommets with retention bracket. Allows six cable entries (Min 0.23"- Max 0.48" and flat drop) Large Single Grommet Kit (10) Large Dual Grommet Kit Large 6 Port Drop Kit FC continued on next page Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

120 LightGuard 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure (cont.) (cont.) Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure) Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit LG-400/500/600 Retention hardware for additional cables or replacement hardware LG/400/500/600 (no grommets) Closure Extension Kit Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers Adjustable Hanger LG-400/500/600 Offset Hanger LG-400/500/600 Cable Retention Kit LG-400/500/600 Closure Extension Kit LG-400/500/ FC x6 Fiber Router Kit with furcation tubes 1x6 Fiber Router FC Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) Clamp-On Ground Cable Only CGK-5 FC *Mechanical Splice Kit. Includes 10 pieces of VHB tape. VHB Tape FA Used in all splice trays. Each piece holds 12 splices. LG600 FTTx Expansion Kit Includes (1) Stacker Module, LG600 FTTx FC (1) SC-6-Pack Bracket. Allows use of standard splice trays Expansion Kit * See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 7,

121 LightGuard Aerial Splice Closure Accessories Dual- and Multi-port Grommet Kits for LG-400/LG-500/LG-600 For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the single-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the multi-port grommet set when drops are required. Retention hardware included. Dual-port Grommet Kit Multi-port Grommet Kit DESCRIPTION Dual-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500 Diameter for large port is 0.375" "; small port, 0.27" - 0.5" Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter for large port is 0.375" "; small port, 0.27" - 0.5" Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port) Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter from 0.3" " Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets Diameter from 0.5" - 1.0" Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500. Diameter up to 0.365" Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-600. Diameter from 0.67" to 0.475" FC FC Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the multi-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the single-port grommet set when installing a branch cable. Hardware included. DESCRIPTION Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit LG-600 Hardware FC FC Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). This pair of hanger brackets is shipped from the factory with all weathertight closures. Purchase separately for closures installed over existing utilities. DESCRIPTION Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

122 LightGuard Aerial Splice Closure Accessories (cont.) SC 6-Pack Bracket for LG-600 Installs at each end of the stacker module in the LG-600. Allows up to (12) SC connectors or (24) LC connectors (using duplex connectors) to be installed in the closure. Snaps in place or use self-tapping screws to secure. DESCRIPTION SC 6-Pack Bracket Kit for LG-600 FM SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket FM Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx Expansion kit includes a Stacker Tray Module and one LG-600 SC-6-Pack Bracket to allow for up to six SC connections or 12 LC duplex connections. An additional bracket may be used to increase connectivity to 12 SC or 24 LC connections using duplex adapters. Allows increasing splices with LL-2400, LL-2448 and LL S splice trays. DESCRIPTION Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx FC Cable Grounding Harness For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). DESCRIPTION Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG FC Aerial Hanger Kits For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500, LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). DESCRIPTION Extended Aerial Hanger Kit Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 2,

123 Interchangeable Grommets for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures LL-400sx LL-400b (inner 4 grommets) LL-580 LG-410 Cable Sealing Grommets LL-500 LG-420 LG , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

124 Interchangeable Large Grommets for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures LL-400b (outer 2 grommets) LG-600 Cable Sealing Grommets , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

125 Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures LG-500 LG-410 Optical Splice Trays LG-600 LL-4848 LL LL-2448 LL-400sx LL-400b , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

126 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays AFL s LightLink series of Fiber Optic Splice Trays offers a variety of unique and flexible splice and storage possibilities. They are available in industry standard config urations (single, mass). Features In-line or butt splice capability (see model descriptions) Pre-formed radiuses maintain bend requirements Interlocking base and cover provides tray stability without the use of a bolt Extended finger guides easily store and route loose fiber or ribbon Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-55-U LG-150-U LG-250-U LG-350-U Single Fuse: 32 Mass Fuse: N/A 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H) LL-2425 FC Max trays: 1 Single: 32 Mass: N/A N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: 48 Mass: N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: N/A Mass: 32 (384 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: 48 Mass: 48 (384 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: 24 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) LL N/A N/A Max Trays: 5 Single: 120 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 13 Single: 312 Mass: N/A , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

127 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-250-U LG-350-U LG-350-AC LG-350XL-U Single Fuse: 60 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-7644 FA N/A Max Trays: 6 Single: 360 Mass: 72 (864 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: 24 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 3 Single: 72 Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mechanical: 36 Max Trays: 8 Single: 192 Mass: 32 (384 fiber) Mechanical: 96 N/A N/A Single Fuse: 48 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL S FA Max Trays: 3 Single: 144 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 8 Single: 384 Mass: N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Max Trays: 8 Single: N/A Mass: 96 (1152 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: 96 Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber) " (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 5 Single: 480 Mass: 120 (1440 fiber) N/A Max Trays: 9 Single: 864 Mass: 216 (2592 fiber) Single Fuse: 60 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-7060 FA N/A Max Trays: 6 Single: 360 Mass: N/A N/A N/A , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

128 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Trays for LG-350 and LG-350XL-U Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-350-U LG-350-AC LG-350XL-U Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-7144 FA Max Trays: 6 Single: 360 Mass: 72 (864 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: 36 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808L-R FA N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: 144 Mass: 48 (576 fiber) N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808 R FA N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: N/A Mass: 48 (576 fiber) N/A Single Fuse: 36 Mass Fuse: N/A 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808 L FA N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: 144 Mass: N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber) " (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4896 R FA Max Trays: 5 Single: N/A Mass: 120 (1440 fiber) N/A Max Trays: 9 Single: N/A Mass: 216 (2592 fiber) Single Fuse: 96 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4896 L FA Max Trays: 5 Single: 480 Mass: N/A N/A Max Trays: 9 Single: 864 Mass: N/A , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

129 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-410-U LG-420-U FTTx LG-500-U LG-500-U FTTx Single Fuse: 24 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) LL Max Trays: 4 Single: 96 Mass: N/A N/A Max Trays: 4 Single: 96 Mass: N/A N/A Single Fuse: 32 Mass Fuse: N/A 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H) LL-2425 FC N/A Max Trays: 1 Single: 32 Mass: N/A N/A Max Trays: 1 Single: 32 Mass: N/A Single Fuse: 24 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 3 Single: 72 Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mechanical: 36 N/A Max Trays: 3 Single: 72 Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mechanical: 36 N/A Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 36 (432 fiber) N/A Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 36 (432 fiber) N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL N/A N/A N/A N/A , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

130 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-500-U-FTTx-ISO LG-600-U LG-600 FTTx Single Fuse: 24 LL N/A Max Trays: 12 Max Trays: 2 Mass Fuse: N/A Single: 288 Single: " (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H) Mass: N/A Mass: N/A LG-600-U-FTTx-ISO N/A Single Fuse: 32 Mass Fuse: N/A 6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H) LL-2425 FC N/A N/A N/A N/A Single Fuse: 24 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 8 Single: 192 Mass: 32 (384 fiber) Mechanical: 12 N/A N/A Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: N/A 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL Max Trays: 1 Single: 12 Mass: N/A N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Single: 24 Mass: N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL N/A Max Trays: 8 Single: N/A Mass: 96 (1152 fiber) N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL Max Trays: 1 Single: N/A Mass: 8 (96 fiber) N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Single: N/A Mass: 16 (192 fiber) Single Fuse: 12 Mass Fuse: 8 (96) 7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H) LL Max Trays: 1 Single: 12 Mass: 8 (96 fiber) N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Single: 24 Mass: 16 (192 fiber) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

131 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Ordering information Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LG-410-U LG-500-U LG-600-U Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Max Trays: 8 Single: N/A Mass: 32 (384 fiber) Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LL-400B WITH INTERCONNECT LL-400B WITHOUT INTERCONNECT Single Fuse: 24 LL Max Trays: 4 Max Trays: 6 Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) Single: 96 Single: 144 Mechanical : 12 Mass: 16 (192 fiber) Mass: 24 (288 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) Mechanical: 48 Mechanical: 72 LL-400SX WITH 2 LGX PLATES Max Trays: 3 Single: 72 Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Mechanical: 36 LL-400SX WITHOUT LGX PLATES Max Trays: 9 Single: 216 Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Mechanical: 108 Single Fuse: 48 Mass Fuse: N/A " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL S FA Max Trays: 4 Single: 192 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 6 Single: 288 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 3 Single: 144 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 9 Single: 432 Mass: N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H) LL Max Trays: 4 Single: N/A Mass: 48 (576 fiber) Max Trays: 6 Single: N/A Mass: 72 (864 fiber) Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Max Trays: 9 Single: N/A Mass: 108 (1296 fiber) Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber) " (L) x 4.270" (W) x (H) LL Max Trays: 4 Single: N/A Mass: 16 (192 fiber) Max Trays: 6 Single: N/A Mass: 24 (288 fiber) Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 12 (144 fiber) Max Trays: 9 Single: N/A Mass: 108 (1296 fiber) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

132 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. LL-500 WITH LL-500 WITHOUT LGX LL LGX PLATES PLATES Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) " (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H) LL-7144 FA N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Single: N/A Mass: 24 (288 fiber) Single Fuse: 60 Mass Fuse: 12 (144) " (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H) LL-7644 FA N/A N/A Max Trays: 2 Single: 120 Mass: 24 (288 fiber) Single Fuse: 36 Mass Fuse: N/A 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808 L FA Max Trays: 3 Single: 108 Mass: N/A Max Trays: 7 Single: 252 Mass: N/A N/A Single Fuse: N/A Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808 R FA Max Trays: 3 Single: N/A Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Max Trays: 7 Single: N/A Mass: 84 (1008 fiber) N/A Single Fuse: 36 Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber) 8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H) LL-4808L-R FA Max Trays: 3 Single: 108 Mass: 36 (432 fiber) Max Trays: 7 Single: 252 Mass: 84 (1008 fiber) Max Trays: 2 Single: 72 Mass: 24 (288 fiber) , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

133 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays (cont.) Splice Tray for Splicing Cabinets and Shelves DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. Telescoping Splice Tray - Stores up to 48 single fusion sleeves or 12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers). For use in the following products: LL-300, LL-288/576, LL-720/1440, OTSS-SYS1, OSS-SYS2 and OSS-SYS1. STF FTTx Splice Tray - Stores up to 2 single fusion sleeves. For use in the following products: ONT-760XL, ONT-3000 and CG-1500 DM Bare Fiber Splice Tray - Stores up 24 single fusion fibers without sleeves. For use in the following products: Any product that accepts the LL-2400 splice tray C Splice Tray Accessories DESCRIPTION 40 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia compliant (50 pcs. per bag) S mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia compliant (50 pcs. per bag) S Single Fusion Splice Chip - 6 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FA Single Fusion Splice Chip - 12 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FC Single Fusion Splice Chip - 24 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) Mass Fusion Splice Chip - 4 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit) FA Mechanical Fusion Splice Tape (10 pcs. per kit) FA Core Tube Cable Fiber Router for routing fiber up to 8 directions. For all central core tube sizes. FC Loose Tube or Ribbon Router for routing fiber up to 6 directions. For all Loose Tube and up to 12 fiber Ribbon. FC Dimensions LL-2448 and LL-4848 Splice Trays LL-1248, LL-2450 and LL-4850 Splice Trays LL-2400 Splice Tray LL-4896 Splice Tray LL-2425 Splice Tray OEE Splice Tray Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 8,

134 Fiber Storage Units AFL Fiber Storage Units (FSU) are used to conveniently and safely store an extra length of cable along the support strand for later use. Furnished as pairs (kit contains two Fiber Storage Units and two sets of hanger brackets), these FSU s are constructed from either aluminum with a baked acrylic enamel finish or dielectric polypropylene with a UV inhibitor. All basic hardware for attachment to the support strand is provided. Strand mount support brackets meet Telcordia specifications. Galvanized strand clamping devices accommodate 1/4" to 7/16" strand and meet ASTM specifications A153 and B695. Reserve Cable Storage Features Small profile and side facing channel minimizes ice and leaf loading Metal versions feature an all aluminum construction with welded cross members and baked acrylic enamel paint finish with chromate pre-finish per MIL B Plastic versions feature thermoplastic polypropylene resin with carbon black UV inhibitor Basic hanging hardware (bolts, nuts, washers) and strand clamps all included Tie-wrap slots for securing cable from sliding Galvanized strand clamps accommodate 1/4" to 7/16" strand Specifications PARAMETER FSU-10 FSU-12 FSU-16 FSU-18 FSU-20 FSU-24 Nom. Channel Width in. (cm) 0.63 (1.60) 0.92 (2.34) 1.12 (2.84) 1.75 (4.45) 1.75 (4.45) (4.5) Min. Bend Diameter in. (cm) 10 (25.4) 12 (30.48) 16 (40.64) 18 (45.72) 20 (50.80) (61.3) PARAMETER FOSP-12-TMK FOSP-17-TMK Nom. Channel Width in. (cm) 0.63 (1.59) 0.95 (2.41) Min. Bend Diameter in. (cm) (30.80) 17.5 (44.45) Butt Splice DESCRIPTION FSU-10 FSU-12 FSU-16 FSU-18 FSU-20 FSU-24 FSU Kit FA DESCRIPTION FOSP-12-TMK FOSP-17-TMK FOSP Kit (Dielectric) FA FA Kits contain one pair of either FSU or FOSP and four mount brackets. Hardware Diagram In-Line Splice Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

135 Fiber Storage Units for ADSS Fiber Optic Cable AFL Fiber Storage Units (FSU) are used to conveniently store an extra length of cable along the ADSS cable run for later use. Furnished as pairs (kit contains two Fiber Storage Units and two sets of hanger brackets), these FSUs are constructed from UV stabilized PPE thermoplastic. All basic hardware for attachment to the ADSS cable is provided. ADSS cable mount support brackets meet Telcordia specifications. Epoxy coated clamping devices meet ASTM specifications A153 and B695. Features Small profile and side facing channel minimizes ice and leaf loading Constructed from UV stabilized PPE thermoplastic Basic hanging hardware (bolts, nuts, washers) and strand clamps all included Tie-wrap slots for securing cable Epoxy-coated strand clamps The mounting bracket features an angled, tent-profile, epoxy-coated bracket for standard ADSS cable mounting. Specifications PARAMETER FOSDA12ADSS FOS17ADSS Nominal Channel Width - in. (cm) Minimum Bend Diameter - in. (cm) DESCRIPTION FOSDA12ADSS FOS17ADSS FOS ADSS Kit FA FA Kits contain one pair of FOSP and two sets of hanger brackets. Typical Installation Diagram Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

136 70S In case with lid detached Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 70S is the world s fastest and most robust core alignment fusion splicer. Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency. A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion. Fully programmable auto open sheath clamps open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal. A new automated clamshell design tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 14-second shrink time. The result is a total splice process time of approximately 21 seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhanced by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor. Battery capacity is now 200 splices/shrinks. An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before. Features Automated and programmable wind protector 14-second automated tube heater Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture Li-ion battery with 200 splices/shrinks per charge 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation On-board training and support videos Internet software upgrades Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation DESCRIPTION 70S Fusion Splicer (machine only) Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver) Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord) Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty Two Year Extended Warranty S S S S S , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

137 Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer Recommended Accessories for the 70S DESCRIPTION Cleavers CT-06A Cleaver CT-30A Cleaver Fiber Holders FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder FUSEConnect Accessories FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2.0 mm sheathing) (each) FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3.0 mm sheathing) (pair) FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) Sheath Clamps CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp (Coating diameter from 100 µm µm (5-16 mm cleave)) CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp (900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave)) S S S S S S S S S S S S S S DESCRIPTION Batteries and Power Cords ADC-18 AC Adapter ACC-14 AC Power Cord BTR-09 Battery DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord DCC-12 Power Cord (connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket) DCC-13 Power Cord (connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips) Miscellaneous ELCT2-20A Electrodes Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) SL-01 Sleeve Loader Worktable Upper Worktable Lower Inner Box Set USB Cable CC-30 Transit Case S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 70S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G.652 & G.657), Multimode (G.651), DS (G.653), NZDS (G.655) Cladding Diameter μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 1,000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0.02 db with SM, 0.01 db with MM, 0.04 db with DS, 0.04 db with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards Splicing Time SM FAST mode 7 seconds; SM AUTO mode 10 seconds; AUTO mode 15 seconds with SM fiber Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera core axis alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 results stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously. Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation Magnification 320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4.7 inch TFT color LCD monitor Operating Condition 0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50 C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1.96 to 2.25N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time Typical 14 seconds with FP-03 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 3,000 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14.8 V DC with BTR-09 battery Terminals USB 1.1 (USB-B type) for PC communication. Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s. (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5.75 W x 6.25 D x 5.9 H (inches) Weight 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) with AC adapter ADC-18; 2.7 kg (5.95 lbs) with BTR-09 battery , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

138 Fujikura 62S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 62S provides active core alignment splice loss performance while utilizing a conventional wind protector and tube heater design. An alternative to the fully automated core-alignment model 70S, the 62S includes an auto-start feature for both the splicing and tube heating process that minimizes the steps necessary to process splices. With a shrink time of 23 seconds with standard splice sleeves, the 62S ensures a high level of productivity. Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, durability is greatly enhanced by a mirrorless optical system and "severeimpact resistant" monitor. Battery capacity is 200 splices/shrinks. The transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever. Features 5,000 splices electrode life 23 second tube heating time with standard sleeves Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture Li-ion battery with 200 splices/shrinks per charge 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation Internet software upgrades Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation DESCRIPTION 62S Fusion Splicer (machine only) Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S21A Sheath Clamp, Sleeve Loader, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screwdriver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC-24 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 62S Fusion Splicer Kit (with CT-06A cleaver) Includes: CT-06A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S21A Sheath Clamp, Sleeve Loader, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screwdriver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC-24 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 62S Fusion Splicer Kit (with CT-06A cleaver, battery and cord) Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT-06A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S21A Sheath Clamp, Sleeve Loader, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screwdriver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC-24 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 62S Fusion Splicer Kit (with CT-30A cleaver) Includes: CT-30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S21A Sheath Clamp, Sleeve Loader, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screwdriver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC-24 Transit Case with Carrying Strap 62S Fusion Splicer Kit (with CT-30A cleaver, battery and cord) Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT-30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S21A Sheath Clamp, Sleeve Loader, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screwdriver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC-24 Transit Case with Carrying Strap One Year Extended Warranty Two Year Extended Warranty S S S S S S S , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

139 Fujikura 62S Fusion Splicer Recommended Accessories for the 62S DESCRIPTION Cleavers CT-06A Cleaver CT-30A Cleaver Fiber Holders FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) FUSEConnect Accessories FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2.0 mm sheathing) (each) FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3.0 mm sheathing) (pair) FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) Sheath Clamps CLAMP-S21A Sheath Clamp (Coating diameter from 100 µm µm (5-16 mm cleave)) CLAMP-S21B Sheath Clamp (900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave)) S S S S S S S S S S S S S DESCRIPTION Batteries and Power Cords ADC-18 AC Adapter ACC-14 AC Power Cord BTR-09 Battery DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord DCC-12 Power Cord (connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket) DCC-13 Power Cord (connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips) Miscellaneous ELCT2-20A Electrodes Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) JP-08 J-PLATE SL-01 Sleeve Loader USB Cable CC-24 Transit Case S S S S S S S S S S S S S Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 62S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G.652 and G.657), Multimode (G.651), DS (G.653), NZDS (G.655) Cladding Diameter 80 μm to 150 μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 1,000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0.02 db with SM, 0.01 db with MM, 0.04 db with DS, 0.04 db with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards Splicing Time ULTRA FAST mode 6 seconds; SM FAST mode 7 seconds; SM AUTO mode 10 seconds with SM fiber Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes 100 preset and user programmable modes Splice Loss Estimate Based upon dual camera core axis alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 10,000 results stored in the internal memory Fiber Display X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously. Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation Magnification 320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view Viewing Method Dual cameras with 4.7 inch TFT color LCD monitor Operating Condition 0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50 C respectively Mechanical Proof Test 1.96 to 2.25N Tube Heater Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function Tube Heating Time Typical 23 seconds with FP-03 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves, 15 seconds with slim 60 mm and 40 mm sleeves Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with power save functions activated Electrode Life 5,000 Arc Discharges Power Supply Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14.8 V DC with BTR-09 battery Terminals USB 1.1 (USB-B type) for PC communication. Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s (34 mph) Dimensions 146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5.75 W x 6.25 D x 5.9 H (inches) Weight 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) with AC adapter ADC-18; 2.7 kg (5.95 lbs) with BTR-09 battery , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 1,

140 22S (with Cleaver for scale) Workstation in Transit Case Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 22S active cladding alignment fusion splicer bridges the long standing gap between core alignment and fixed v-groove fusion splicer technology. Moveable v-grooves eliminate splicer errors due to dust and other contaminants. Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments. The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 200 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve. The Fujikura 22S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models. Removable sheath clamps allow the use of fiber holders if desired. The large 4.7" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality. The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization. Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available. The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations. The Fujikura 22S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect line of fusion installable connectors. Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 22S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application. Features Dual camera, active cladding alignment technology World s smallest active clad alignment splicer at 4.72"W x 7.44"D x 2.8"H Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance Transit case converts to easy to use workstation Extended life electrodes Long life battery (200 splices/shrinks per charge) Auto start tube heater Workstation on Transit Case Fujikura 22S Kit 1 DESCRIPTION Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer Includes: Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer Kit 1 Includes: Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer, CT-30A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer Kit 2 Includes: Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer, CT-06A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case One Year Extended Warranty Two Year Extended Warranty S S S S S , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 0,

141 Fujikura 22S Fusion Splicer Recommended Accessories for the 22S DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Cleavers FUSEConnect Accessories CT-06A Cleaver S FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2.0 mm sheathing) (each) S CT-30A Cleaver S FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3.0 mm sheathing) (pair) S Fiber Holders FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) S FH Fiber Holder (250 µm single fiber) S CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) S FH Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber) S CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube) S Miscellaneous Sheath Clamps Worktable Set S CLAMP-S21A Sheath Clamp S TS-01 Tripod Screw S CLAMP-S21B Sheath Clamp S ELCT2-12 Electrodes S Batteries ADC-19 AC Adapter S BTR-11 Battery Pack S ACC-09 Power Cord S AP-01 Alcohol Container S SD-01 Screwdriver S CC-32 Transit Case S Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G.652 & G.657), Multimode (G.651), DSF (G.653), NZDS (G.655) Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 100 μm to 3000 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 mm to 16 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0.03 db (SM), 0.01 db (MM), 0.05 db (DS) and 0.05 db (NZDS) Splicing Time Typical 9 sec with SM Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes Total 100 splice modes Splice Loss Estimate Based on dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 splices Fiber Display 4.7 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously Magnification 200X magnification for X/Y view Viewing Method 2 axis CMOS camera Operating Condition Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10 to 50 C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew Mechanical Proof Test 1.96 N Tube Heater 30 heating modes Tube Heating Time Typical 24 sec with FP-60 (60 mm) sleeve Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with BTR-11 Electrode Life 3,000 splices Power Supply Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14.8 V DC with installed battery Terminals USB 2.0 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s. (34 mph) Dimensions 120 x 189 x 71 (mm) / 4.72" x 7.44" x 2.8" (inches) Weight 1.14 kg (2.51 lbs) with battery , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 0,

142 12S (with Cleaver for scale) Workstation in Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer The Fujikura 12S is the world s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today. Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments. The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve. The Fujikura 12S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models. The large 4.5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality. The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization. Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available. The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations. The Fujikura 12S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect line of fusion installable connectors. Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application. Features World s smallest splicer at 4.76"W x 6.38"D x 2.24"H Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance Transit case converts to easy to use workstation Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology Extended life electrodes Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge) Workstation on Transit Case Fujikura 12S Kit 1 DESCRIPTION Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH Fiber Holders (pair), FH Fiber Holder, ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 1 Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH Fiber Holders (pair), FH Fiber Holders (pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 2 Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-06 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH Fiber Holders (pair), FH Fiber Holders (pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case One Year Extended Warranty Two Year Extended Warranty S S S S S , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

143 Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Recommended Accessories for the 12S DESCRIPTION Cleavers CT-06 Cleaver (for single fibers) CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers) Fiber Holders FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH Fiber Holder (pair) FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair) FUSEConnect Accessories FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2.0 mm sheathing) (each) FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3.0 mm sheathing) (pair) FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each) CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair) CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair) S S S S S S S S S S DESCRIPTION Batteries BTR-10 Battery Pack Miscellaneous Worktable Set TS-01 Tripod Screw ELCT2-12 Electrodes ADC-19 AC Adapter ACC-09 Power Cord AP-01 Alcohol Container SD-01 Screwdriver CC-29 Transit Case USB Cable S S S S S S S S S S Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Model 12S Fusion Splicer Applicable Fibers Single-mode (G.652 & G.657), Multimode (G.651), DSF (G.653), NZDS (G.655) Cladding Diameter 125 μm Coating Diameter 250 μm or 900 μm Fiber Cleave Length 5 mm to 13 mm Typical Average Splice Loss 0.05 db (SM), 0.02 db (MM), 0.08 db (DS) and 0.08 db (NZDS) Splicing Time Typical 15 sec with SM Arc Calibration Method Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available Splicing Modes Total 100 splice modes Splice Loss Estimate Based on dual camera cladding alignment data Storage of Splice Result Last 2,000 splices Fiber Display 4.5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously Magnification 100X magnification for X/Y view Viewing Method 2 axis CMOS camera Operating Condition Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10 to 50 C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew Mechanical Proof Test 1.96 N Tube Heater 30 heating modes Tube Heating Time Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) sleeve Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, micro Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10 Electrode Life 3,000 splices Power Supply Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14.8 V DC with installed battery Terminals USB 2.0 Wind Protection Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s. (34 mph) Dimensions 121 x 162 x 57 (mm) / 4.76 x 6.38 x 2.24 (inches) Weight.776 kg (1.71 lbs) with battery , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 4,

144 Portable Tripod Workstation Kit (splicer and cleaver not included) Cleaver mount assembly swings into and out of the work space Portable Tripod Workstation As splicing requirements have migrated from aerial to ground level locations, a sturdy splicing workstation with the ability to adjust for uneven ground surfaces has been missing from the splicing marketplace. That problem is solved with AFL s Portable Tripod Workstation the critical missing link in splicing productivity. The Portable Tripod Workstation offers both a sturdy work tray to support the splicer, cleaver and accessories, and a tripod to support the work tray. The two can be purchased together as a kit or separately for those users who prefer to use their own tripod or mounting mechanism. The work tray incorporates a unique cleaver mounting system that offers flexibility and convenience for the user. The cleaver mounting arm pivots into and out of the work space, as needed, and securely captures the CT-30, CT-20 and CT-04 style cleavers. The base of the cleaver mounting assembly can be moved to any one of four positions on the tray to accommodate user preferences. The tripod is solidly constructed but lightweight, weighing less than six pounds, and collapses to a length of only twenty-five inches. The telescoping legs offer flexible height adjustments from thirteen inches to sixty-one inches and the leg angle can be increased for unusual surfaces. Features Sturdy work tray supports the splicer, cleaver and accessories Tripod supports a load capacity of up to eleven pounds Independent telescoping tripod legs support uneven work surfaces Leveraged handles securely lock work tray into position Cleaver mount assembly swings cleaver into and out of the work space Optional cleaver mounting positions accommodate user preferences Compatible with all FSM-17, FSM-18, FSM-50, FSM-60 and 12/19/70 series models Portable Work Tray showing the four mounting positions of the cleaver mount assembly (delivered as shown) DESCRIPTION Portable Tripod Workstation Kit Includes: Tripod with pan head and quick release platform (make and model of tripod may change without notice), portable work tray with cleaver mount assembly and canvas carrying case Portable Work Tray Includes: Portable work tray with cleaver mount assembly and canvas carrying case Tripod Includes: Tripod with pan head and quick release platform (make and model of tripod may change without notice) Optional Accessories DESCRIPTION TS-01 TRIPOD SCREW (required for 12S & 12R models) S S S S , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

145 Pole Mount Splicing Workstation Aerial mounting system ASW-02 Splicing Workstation The ASW-02 Splicing Workstation can be used with a fusion splicer and cleaver in aerial or terrestrial splicing applications. The ASW-02 provides a stable work surface and secure mounting of the splicer and cleaver to prevent accidental drops and equipment damage in challenging splicing locations. The ASW-02 Splicing Workstation consists of the work tray, a convenient pivoting cleaver mounting arm, a post for attachment to bucket or ladder mounting accessories, a tripod mount, and dual safety straps. An aerial mounting system is available for direct attachment of the workstation to a telephone pole, or for suspending the workstation from an aerial cable strand. The strand mounting system is fully adjustable to provide for optimal location of the workstation when minimal slack fiber is available, such as in a taut-sheath cable access scenario. In the aerial environment, the safety straps may be secured to the cable strand to provide security and aid with workstation position adjustment. The safety straps are also used to secure the workstation to the pole, and may be used to raise or lower the workstation. Features Provides direct to pole mounting as well as direct adjustable attachment to aerial strand Mounting post provided for attachment to bucket and ladder mounting accessories (utilizing any popular copper splicer-head mounting rigs) Tripod mount allows for placement in tight FTTH splicing applications Includes cable tie locations to secure cables during splicing Optimized to simplify taut sheath splicing applications Cleaver mount securely captures cleaver and allows operator to rotate it in and out of the workspace as needed Matte finish minimizes glare Compatible with all FSM-17, FSM-18, FSM-50, FSM-60 and 19/70 series models Safety Straps Mounting clamp DESCRIPTION ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (Full kit with aerial mounting system) Includes aerial mounting system to provide strand and pole mounting capability, a post for attachment to bucket or ladder mount accessories and a receptacle for tripod mounting and safety straps ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (Without aerial mounting system) Includes a post for attachment to bucket or ladder mount accessories and a receptacle for tripod mounting SO10532 SO13620 Cleaver mount Tray assembly Aerial Mounting System *Illustration for reference only , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 3,

146 Splice Protection Sleeves AFL offers a wide selection of fiber protection sleeves to meet any application. The FP series is the industry standard for durable and lasting protection of single fiber splices in field installations, while the FP-04(T) and FP-05 provide the same durable protection for 8 and 12 fiber ribbon respectively. The FPS01 and FPS04 series are specially designed for optical components, where small packaging is a priority. These micro sleeves provide the known reliability of Fujikura sleeves in the smallest possible lengths. This easy and cost effective method is a great alternative to recoating. The FPS01 and FPS04 series offer a wide range of options to accommodate various coating sizes, and are manufactured in a variety of lengths. This gives great flexibility in designing optical modules. Standard Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber SLEEVES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRONS DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING FP mm 16 mm 3.1 mm (max.) 1000 Box/100 Pack S FP mm 10 mm 3.1 mm (max.) 1000 Box/100 Pack S FP-03(34) 34 mm 10 mm 3.1 mm (max.) 500 Box/10 Pack S SLEEVES FOR TFOCA CABLE (DUAL 900 μm) DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING FP-D mm 10 mm 3.6 mm (max.) 1000 Box & 50 Pack S SLEEVES FOR RIBBON FIBERS DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING FP-04(T) Up to 8 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 4.1 mm (max.) 250 Box/25 Pack S FP-05 Up to 12 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 4.5 mm (max.) 250 Box/5 Pack S FP Up to 12 fibers 28 mm 10 mm 4.5 mm (max.) 250 Box/25 Pack S FPS04-30 Up to 4 fibers 30 mm 10 mm 2.4 mm (max.) 1,000 Box/25 Pack S FPS08-28 Up to 8 fibers 28 mm 10 mm 3.4 mm (max.) 500 Box/25 Pack S FPS24-40 Up to 24 fibers 40 mm 10 mm 8 mm (max.) 200 Box/5 Pack S Specifications PARAMETER DESCRIPTION VALUE Outer tube FP-60/40/03 series FP-04(T) / FP-05 Polyethylene Inner tube Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer) Strength member Operation condition (after shrink) Storage condition (before shrink) FP-60/40/03 series FP-04(T) / FP-05 Stainless steel Quartz glass -40 to 75 C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew) -40 to 60 C, Non dew FP-03 series FPS01 series FP-40 series FP-60 series FP-04(T)/05 FPS04-30 FPS , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

147 Splice Protection Sleeves Micro Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber FPS SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 400 MICRON FIBER DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING FPS mm 4 mm 1.5 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 4 mm 1.5 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 8 mm 1.5 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 10 mm 1.5 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 15 mm 1.5 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 16 mm 1.5 mm 1,250 Box S FPS SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRON FIBER DESCRIPTION SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK PACKAGING FPS mm 4 mm 2.3 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 6 mm 2.3 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 6 mm 2.3 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 13 mm 2.3 mm 50 Pack S FPS mm 16 mm 2.3 mm 50 Pack S Specifications PARAMETER MODEL VALUE Outer tube FPS01 series / FPS04-30 Polyethylene Inner tube Strength member Operation condition (after shrink) Storage condition (before shrink) FPS01 series FPS04-30 / FPS08-28 Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer) Stainless steel Quartz glass -40 to 75 C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew) -40 to 60 C, Non dew Type Variations FULL SCALE , AFL, all rights reserved. PP , Revision 5,

148 M710 Multifunction OTDR Test, Troubleshoot and Report Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks M710 Compact QUAD OTDR Features Industry leading TruEvent analysis LinkMap for easy results interpretation Dynamic range up to 44 db Automatic Pass/Fail analysis Live fiber detection Front Panel and First Connector Check Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope Integrated power meter (OPM) and visual fault locator (VFL) Up to 13 hours battery life Large 6.5 inch full color touchscreen display Applications Test and certify campus & central office networks and Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) fiber infrastructure Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing and certification of SM and MM networks Long Haul Network LAN/WAN M710 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope The M710 OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test ) and high performance in a rugged, large display package. With singlemode dynamic ranges up to 44 db and a MM/SM QUAD option, the M710 OTDR is ideal for testing and troubleshooting LAN/WAN, metro and long haul networks. Industry leading dead zones enhance the user s ability to locate and measure events. The M710 models utilize AFL s industry leading TruEvent technology to provide a new level of accuracy and reliability in event analysis. LinkMap visualizes test results for easy and quick interpretation. Touch and Test simplifies the M710 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to all OTDR test modes, OPM testing, Results Management and Job Creation menus. The M710 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO values or user defined criteria and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables any technician to complete jobs more accurately and in less time, making it the ideal field test tool. *M710 series languages supported: English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish. Please specify language when ordering. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1B,

149 M710 Multifunction OTDR Specifications a OTDR MODEL SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS QUAD OTDR OPTION Emitter Type M M M M Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : Center Wavelengths 1310/1550 nm 1310/1550 nm 1310/1550/1625 nm 850/1300/1310/1550 nm Wavelength Tolerance ±25/25 nm ±25/25 nm ±25/25/10 nm ±25/25/25/25 nm Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) b 44/42 db 41/39 db 41/39/39 db 25/24/40/38 db c Event Dead Zone 0.8 m d 0.8 m d 0.8 m d 0.8 m d Attenuation Dead Zone 4 m e 4 m e 4 m e 4 m e Pulse Widths 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10, 20 µs Laser MM SM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1 µs 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10, 20 µs Range Settings 250 m to 256 km MM 250 m to 64 km SM 250 m to 256 km Sampling Points Max. 64,000 points Minimum Data Point Spacing m Group Index of Refraction (GIR) to Distance Uncertainty (m) f ±( % x distance + data point spacing) Linearity g ±0.03 db/db ±0.05 db/db ±0.05 db/db ±0.05 db/db Loss Threshold 0.05 db Loss Resolution 0.01 db Reflectance Accuracy h ±2 db Trace File Format SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A & B and SR-4731) Trace File Storage Media Internal flash memory USB flash drive (2 USB host ports) Downloadable from OTDR directly to PC Trace File Storage Capacity Internal 1000 fibers Data Transfer to PC USB OTDR Modes Full Auto, Real Time, Expert Tool Free Adapters SC/ST/FC/LC Notes: a. All specifications valid at 23 C ±2 C (73.4 F ±3.6 F) unless otherwise specified. b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on, Typical. c µm fiber for multimode test. d. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 db down each side of an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 db for SM and <-40 db for MM using a 5 ns pulse width. e. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 db of backscatter caused by an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 db for SM and <-40 db for MM using a 5 ns pulse width. f. Does not include GIR uncertainty. g. Typical. h. For a non-saturated event. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1B,

150 M710 Multifunction OTDR Specifications a POWER METER SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS QUAD OTDR OPTIONS M M M M Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) Detector Type Filtered InGaAs detector InGaAs 2 mm Measurement Range (dbm) +26 to -50 dbm +3 to -70 dbm Accuracy b ±0.25 Measurement Units Wavelength ID c Set Reference Data Storage Tone Detection db, dbm, mw Yes Yes Yes 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR ALL M710 OTDR MODELS Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : Wavelength 635 ±20 nm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mw GENERAL Display Anti-Reflective (AR) Coating Size Weight Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Power Battery Life d, f Recharge Time e, f ALL M710 OTDR MODELS cm (6.5 in), color, transflective (indoor/outdoor) touch screen display Yes x x 69.8 mm (7.5 x 10.6 x 2.75 in) 2.36 kg ( 5.22 lb) -10 C to+50 C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) -20 C to+60 C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing) Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter 13 hours continuous OTDR testing 4 hours Notes: a. All specifications valid at 25 C unless otherwise specified. b. Accuracy measured at -10 dbm per N.I.S.T. standards. c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with AFL s Wave ID Series Light Sources. d. Typical, per GR-196-CORE issue 2, depending on display brightness. e. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. f. External battery charger available. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1B,

151 M710 Multifunction OTDR The M710 OTDRs work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope (the DFS1 includes a software update for the OTDR). The M710 models come with an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), Optical Power Meter (OPM), and a large transflective touch screen display. Each model includes an OTDR, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and OPM loss reporting, AC adapter a, switchable test port adapters, and cleaning accessories in a soft carry case. When placing an order, select options as follows: Optical Configuration (NN), OTDR port ferrule (F), and Language (LL). Example: The model number M710-21U indicates M710 SM with UPC OTDR port ferrule, and English language option. Language option will be selected during ordering process. M710 NN F LL Optical Configuration (NN) 24 = QUAD LR (long range): 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM 21 = 1310/1550/1625 nm SM 20 = 1310/1550 nm SM 40 = 1310/1550 nm SM OTDR Port Ferrule (F) U = UPC A = APC b Language (LL) c 01 = English, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish 08 = English, Traditional and Simplified Chinese Accessories Custom kits may be created by ordering an M710 OTDR model, a pre-configured accessories kit (M700 - H1) and accessories from the table below. The hard carry case has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, test leads/jumpers, the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit, OLS2-Dual or OLS4 optical light source, and cleaning accessories (items must be ordered separately). DESCRIPTION Pre-configured Accessories Kit Includes hard case with One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC (2.5 mm), One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (1.25 mm), and CleanConnect 500 Hard carry case,m7x0/c SERIES,W/FOAM DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters OLS2-Dual laser light source with Wave ID, 1310/1550 nm OLS4 integrated LED and laser light source with Wave ID, 850/1300/1310/1550 nm Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 µm multimode, 150 m Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m Zippered Jumper Carry Case All types of fiber optic cleaning supplies are available. Visit or call factory for details. M700 - H PZ DFS XU DFS XA DFS XN OLS2-Dual OLS4 FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 d FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 d FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 d FR1-SM-150-x1-x2 d PZ Notes: a. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering an OTDR. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge. b. Available on the SM port for -20, -21, -24 models only. c. When ordering OTDR, indicate language preference for the OTDR Quick Reference Guide. d. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2). International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1B,

152 M310 Enterprise OTDR Designed for Enterprise Network Testing, Troubleshooting and Documentation Features Industry leading TruEvent analysis LinkMap for easy results interpretation Short dead zones provide precise testing of closely spaced events Front Panel and First Connector Check Live fiber detection Inspection ready with DFS1 Digital FiberScope Integrated Source, Power Meter and VFL Applications Enterprise network Data Center LAN/WAN Campus and military fiber networks and more Rugged, lightweight and easy to hold, the M310 has a Touch and Test user interface that makes it easy for experts and novices to test and document fiber networks accurately and quickly. TruEvent technology enables M310 to provide superior event analysis capability for user to verify and troubleshoot even the most complex fiber network. LinkMap visualizes test results for easy and quick interpretation. With dynamic range up to 38 db, and 16 hour battery run time, M310 provides complete Tier 1 insertion loss and Tier 2 OTDR testing. Using pre-set Industry ISO/TIA standards or user set Pass/Fail thresholds, technicians are alerted to installation problems and failures in easy-to-interpret event table. Pass/Fail event table and trace are displayed on the same screen for easy correlation. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

153 M310 Enterprise OTDR M310 Models and Included Adapters WAVELENGTHS (nm) DYNAMIC RANGE (db) OTDR PORT ADAPTERS OPM PORT ADAPTERS AFL BASE MODEL NO /37 SC, LC SC, 2.5 & 1.25 mm Universal M /30/38/37 SC, LC, ST SC, 2.5 & 1.25 mm Universal M All M310 OTDRs include a USB flash drive, AC adapter, UCI switchable test port adapters, TRM 2.0 (Basic and Advanced License) and quick reference guide. For customer s convenience, AFL presents several kits options. For detailed contents of each kit, please see page 154. LinkMap LinkMap with Pass/Fail simplifies network troubleshooting and enables even novice users to easily and accurately troubleshoot optical networks. LinkMap presents an icon-based view of the tested network clearly identifying fiber start, end, connectors, splices and macro-bends. A LinkMap Summary provides endto-end link length, loss, loss per distance and ORL. Loss and reflectance of detected events is compared to industry-standard or user-settable pass/fail thresholds and displayed with clear pass/fail indications. Users can easily toggle between LinkMap, Trace view, and Event Table. TruEvent The M310 s TruEvent technology is the result of extensive research into the properties of fiber optic cable events and provides a new level of event detection accuracy and reliability in field test equipment. Taking full advantage of the unit s short dead zone and adding improved event accuracy, this is the best performing OTDR for enterprise and data center applications. With the push of a single button, users can be confident of obtaining accurate locations and measurements of all events, without the confusing introduction of false events. Advanced Analysis (AA) The AA option adds macro/microbend detection and bi-directional trace analysis to the M310 OTDR. Macro/Microbend Macro/Microbend detection helps technicians identify installation problems. Excessive bends or stress on fibers appear as increased attenuation at higher wavelengths. These bends or stresses are indicated on the Event Table with a special icon. Bi-directional Trace Analysis Bi-directional trace analysis, used to resolve splice loss measurement errors due to fiber mismatch, takes the measurement of the loss in both directions, then calculates a two-way average to provide a more accurate loss measurement. Testing and Inspection The M310 is easy to use (Touch and Test ) and comes standard with an integrated source, power meter, visual fault locator, and inspection capability. No surprise add-on charges for these commonly needed support functions. Wave ID Source and Power Meter Enables multi-wavelength insertion loss testing with automatic wavelength synchronization, reducing test time and eliminating setup errors. Source with Tone Generation Use with Optical Fiber Identifier to reliably distinguish in-service fibers from out-of-service fibers carrying test tone. Visual Fault Locator Visibly locate far-end of specific fiber; precisely pinpoint macrobends or breaks in splice enclosures and cabinets. Data storage and reporting Thousands of test results may be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable, via USB cable or USB drive, to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows compatible TRM 2.0 Basic Analysis and Documentation Software (Test Results Manager). The supplied TRM 2.0 Basic is licensed for installation on up to 5 PCs. With the Advanced Analysis standard feature, customer will also receive one copy of TRM 2.0 Advanced. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

154 M310 Enterprise OTDR Specifications a OTDR MULTIMODE SINGLE-MODE Emitter Type Laser Laser Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC : Class I FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC : Center Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Wavelength Tolerance ±20/±30 nm ±20/±30 nm Launch Condition k Controlled Launch at 850 nm k N/A Live Fiber Detection j Yes Yes Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) b 30/30 db 38/37 db Event Dead Zone c 0.8 m 0.8 m Attenuation Dead Zone d 2.5/2.7 m 3.0 m Pulse Widths 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1 µs, 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs, 20 µs Range Settings 250 m to 30 km 250 m to 240 km Sampling Points Up to 120,000 Up to 120,000 Minimum Data Point Spacing e 3 cm 3 cm Group Index of Refraction (GIR) to to Distance Uncertainty/Accuracy f ±( % x distance + data point spacing) ±( % x distance + data point spacing) Linearity g ±0.05 db/db ±0.05 db/db Loss Threshold 0.02 db 0.02 db Loss Resolution 0.01 db 0.01 db Reflectance Range l, h 850 nm: -14 to -58 db (typical) 1300 nm: -14 to -63 db (typical) Reflectance Resolution 0.01 db 0.01 db Reflectance Accuracy h ±2 db ±2 db Real Time Refresh Rate i >2 Hz >2 Hz Units m, km, ft, kft, mi OTDR Modes Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time Trace File Format Bellcore GR-196 Version 1.1, Telcordia SR Issue 2 Trace File Storage Medium Internal and USB Trace File Storage Capacity >1000 internal, 1000s on USB Trace File Transfer to PC USB 1310 nm -14 to -65 db (typical) 1550 nm -14 to -65 db (typical) Notes: a. All specifications valid at 23 C ±2 C (73.4 F ±3.6 F) unless otherwise specified. b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, normal resolution. c. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 db down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -40 db (multimode) or -45 db (single-mode) event using 10 ns pulse width. d. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 db of backscatter. e. Range <8 km. f. Does not include GIR uncertainty. Is based on the trace and user positioned cursors. g. Typical. h. For a non-saturated event. i. 2 km Range, 100 ns. j. Signals greater than -20 dbm MMF and -30 dbm SMF will trigger the Live Fiber Indication warning. k. Comparable to Encircled Flux loss measurement on OM4 fiber networks. l. For OM1 fiber typical Backscatter nm -68 nm -76 db and attenuation nm 2.77 nm 0.52 db. For OS1-OS2 fiber typical Backscatter nm nm -82 db and attenuation nm 0.31 nm 0.18 db. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

155 M310 Enterprise OTDR Specifications a OLS (Standard) Emitter Type Laser, Class 1 (FDA 21 CFR and , and IEC : ) Center Wavelengths (nm) SM 1310/1550 ±20/30 nm; MM 850/1300 ±20/30 nm Spectral Width (FWHM) 5 nm max Internal Modulation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 KHz, CW Wavelength ID (Single/dual) On/Off Output Power Stability b SM < ±0.1 db, MM < ±0.2 db Output Power (CW) c -3 dbm ±1.5 db OPM (Standard) Calibrated Wavelengths Detector Type Display Range d -10 dbm Resolution Measurement Units Wavelength ID e Set Reference Data Storage Tone Detection f VFL (Standard) Emitter Type Safety Class Wavelength Output Power g 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) InGaAs 2 mm +6 to -70 dbm ±0.25 db 0.01 db db, dbm, mw Wave ID TM Yes Yes 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz Laser Class II FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC 825-1:1993, : nm ±20 nm 0 dbm (1 mw) GENERAL Display Type 3.5-inch transflective color, high contrast, high reflectivity (20%) for optimum indoor/outdoor viewing with touchscreen Display Resolution QVGA 240 x 320 Size (in boot) 23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in) Weight <1.0 kg (< 2.0 lb) Drop Test GR-196-CORE Power Removable Li-ion or AC/DC power adapter (input V, ~1.5 A Hz) output 18 V DC/3.6 A (can test while charging, can operate on AC with battery removed) Battery Life h 16 hours Recharge Time i 4 hours Auto Shut Off 0-60 minutes Connectivity USB host/full speed 1.1 Operating Temperature -18 C to +50 C Storage Temperature -30 C to +60 C Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) DFS1 DIGITAL FIBERSCOPE SUPPORT Field of View 400 x 300 µm Optical Resolution 4 µm Detection Capability 2 µm Notes: a. All specifications valid at 23 C ±2 C (73.4 F ±3.6 F) unless otherwise specified. b. Over 1 hour after 15 minute warmup of unit. c. Single-mode: SMF-2 fiber; Multimode: 50 um fiber d. Measurement Range: +3 to -65 dbm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -60 dbm for 850 nm. e. Wavelength ID Range: +3 to -50 dbm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dbm for 850 nm. f. Tone Detect Range: +3 to -50 dbm 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dbm for 850 nm. g. Typical output power. h. Typical with new battery, per GR-196-Core Issue 2. i. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

156 M310 Enterprise OTDR M310 NN P 01 HC O Optical Configuration (NN) 25 = 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM 20 = 1310/1550 nm SM Packaging option (P) U = Unit K = Kit Hard Case option (HC) Select (HC) only if ordering hard case Additional Option blank = no additional hardware 1 = DFS1 2 = DFS1 and OLS Example: M310-20K-01-HC2 This order is for the M310 single-mode OTDR with 1310/1550 nm optical configuration. It s a kit with hard case, DFS1, and OLS. DFS1 and OLS are additional hardware. Below is the chart for your ordering convenience: INTEGRATED OPTION ADDITIONAL OPTION CASE OPTION a, c VFL OPM OLS DFS1 OLS HARD SOFT M310-25U-01 M310-20U-01 M310-25U-01-HC M310-20U-01-HC M310-25K-01-HC1 b M310-20K-01-HC1 b OLS4 M310-25K-01-HC2 b OLS2-Dual M310-20K-01-HC2 b Notes: a. Specify Language for OTDR Quick Reference Guide: English,Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional,German, French, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish, Turkish and Japanese. b. When ordering, specify DFS1 model. The DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit is available as either PC/UPC inspection kit (DFS XU model) or APC inspection kit (DFS1-004XA model). c. Specify Language for OTDR operating environment: English, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), and Japanese. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

157 M310 Enterprise OTDR Accessories, Upgrades, and Calibration Plans DESCRIPTION Inspection DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC inspection kit DFS-00-04XU DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC inspection kit DFS-00-04XA DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit without adapters DFS-00-04XN Fiber Rings 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a Single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a Cleaning Wet Cleaning kit for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors Dry Cleaning kit Basic Cleaning kit with carry case (includes One- FCP Clicks, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB) Basic Cleaning kit with MPO Cleaners and carry FCP case (includes One-Clicks, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB, MPO/MTP Cleaner) One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) MZ One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) MZ One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) MZ One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC MZ (enlarged cleaning) One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC MZ (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) MPO/MTP Cleaner (MPO-CLK-B) CS DESCRIPTION Reporting software add-on TRM 2.0 Basic Software TRM PR (OTDR Trace/OLTS Viewer, Batch Editor & Reports) TRM 2.0 Advanced Software TRM PR (Basic TRM plus Advanced Features & Reports) TRM 2.0 upgrade from Basic to Advanced Software TRM PR Calibration Plan (2 years Calibration plan) b M310-25K-HC2 CAL2-00-M310-25K-HC2 M310-20K-HC2 CAL2-00-M310-20K-HC2 M310-25U-01, -HC, -HC1 CAL2-00-M M310-20U-01, -HC, -HC1 CAL2-00-M Calibration and Warranty plan (2 years Calibration Plus plan) c M310-25K-HC2 CAL2-01-M310-25K-HC2 M310-20K-HC2 CAL2-01-M310-20K-HC2 M310-25U-01, -HC, -HC1 CAL2-01-M M310-20U-01, -HC, -HC1 CAL2-01-M Note: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1, y2). b. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, calibration expiration service and express calibration. c. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty (three years total coverage). International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M Revision 1J,

158 M210e Hand-held OTDR Test, Troubleshoot and Document Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks Features Industry leading TruEvent analysis Short dead zones provide precise testing of closely spaced events 34 db dynamic range single-mode Crisp bright display for indoor/outdoor viewing Integrated Power Meter and VFL (visual fault locator) Inspection ready with DFS1 Digital FiberScope 16 hours battery life Rugged, lightweight (<1 kg) Multiple languages supported Applications Enterprise network LAN/WAN Campus and military fiber networks and more The M210e is the inspection ready OTDR that combines OTDR, OPM and VFL capability with a proven, easy to operate and understand interface. The M210e offers the intuitive Touch and Test user interface in a rugged, lightweight, easy-to-hold package ready for field use. Touch and Test simplifies the M210e user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to the all major functions of the OTDR. The M210e allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO or user-values and automatically alerts users of failing fibers, enabling both experts and novice technicians to complete jobs more accurately and in less time. Available as a single-mode, multimode, or single-mode/multimode model, the M210e comes in either a soft or hard case, also as part of kit for testing, inspection, and certification. The M210e is ideal for testing, analyzing and troubleshooting enterprise, LAN/WAN campus and military facilities. Thousands of test results may be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable, via USB cable or USB drive, to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows compatible TRM 2.0 Basic Analysis and Documentation Software (Test Results Manager). The supplied TRM 2.0 Basic is licensed for installation on up to 5 PCs. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M210e Revision 1A,

159 M210e Hand-held OTDR Specifications a OTDR MULTIMODE SINGLE-MODE Emitter Type Laser Laser Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC : Class I FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC : Center Wavelengths 850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm Wavelength Tolerance ±20/±30 nm ±20/±30 nm Launch Condition n Controlled Launch at 850 nm n N/A Live Fiber Detection m Yes Yes Dynamic Range (SNR = 1) b 28/28 db 34/33 db Event Dead Zone c 1.0 m 1.0 m Attenuation Dead Zone d 4.0 m 4.0 m Pulse Widths 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1 µs, 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs, 20 µs Range Settings 250 m to 30 km 250 m to 240 km Sampling Points Up to 120,000 Up to 120,000 Minimum Data Point Spacing e 3 cm 3 cm Group Index of Refraction (GIR) to to Distance Uncertainty/Accuracy f ±( % x distance + data point spacing) ±( % x distance + data point spacing) Linearity g ±0.05 db/db ±0.05 db/db Loss Threshold 0.02 db 0.02 db Loss Resolution 0.01 db 0.01 db Reflectance Range p, h 850 nm: -14 to -58 db (typical) 1300 nm: -14 to -63 db (typical) 1310 nm -14 to -65 db (typical) 1550 nm -14 to -65 db (typical) Reflectance Resolution 0.01 db 0.01 db Reflectance Accuracy h ±2 db ±2 db Real Time Refresh Rate j >2 Hz >2 Hz Units m, km, ft, kft, mi OTDR Modes Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time Trace File Format Bellcore GR-196 Version 1.1, Telcordia SR Issue 2 Trace File Storage Medium Internal and USB Trace File Storage Capacity >1000 internal, 1000s on USB Trace File Transfer to PC USB Notes: a. All specifications valid at 23 C ±2 C (73.4 F ±3.6 F) unless otherwise specified. b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, normal resolution. c. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 db down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -40 db (multimode) or -45 db (single-mode) event using 10 ns pulse width. d. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 db of backscatter. e. Range <8 km. f. Does not include GIR uncertainty. Is based on the trace and user positioned cursors. g. Typical. h. For a non-saturated event. j. 2 km Range, 100 ns. m. Signals greater than -20 dbm MMF and -30 dbm SMF will trigger the Live Fiber Indication warning. n. Comparable to Encircled Flux loss measurement on OM4 fiber networks. p. For OM1 fiber typical Backscatter nm -68 nm -76 db and attenuation nm 2.77 nm 0.52 db. For OS1-OS2 fiber typical Backscatter nm db, 1550 nm -82 db and attenuation nm 0.31 nm 0.18 db. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M210e Revision 1A,

160 M210e Hand-held OTDR Specifications a OPM (STANDARD) Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously) Detector Type InGaAs 2mm Display Range b +6 to -70 dbm -10 dbm ±0.25 db Resolution 0.01 db Measurement Units db, dbm, mw Wavelength ID c Yes Set Reference Yes Data Storage Yes Tone Detection d 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz VFL (STANDARD) Emitter Type Laser Safety Class Class II FDA 21 CFR and ; IEC 825-1:1993, : Wavelength 635 nm ±20 nm Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mw GENERAL Display Type 3.5-inch transflective color, high contrast, high reflectivity (20%) for optimum indoor/outdoor viewing, QVGA with touchscreen Size (in boot) 23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in) Weight <1.4 kg (3 lb) Power Removable Li-ion or AC/DC power adapter (input V, ~1.5 A Hz) output 18 V DC/3.6 A (can test while charging, can operate on AC with battery removed) Battery Life e 16 hours Recharge Time f 4 hours Auto Shut Off 0-60 minutes Connectivity USB host/full speed 1.1 Operating Temperature -10 C to +50 C Storage Temperature -20 C to +60 C Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing) DFS1 DIGITAL FIBERSCOPE SUPPORT Field of View 400 x 300 µm Optical Resolution 4 µm Detection Capability 2 µm Notes: a. All specifications valid at 23 C ±2 C (73.4 F ±3.6 F) unless otherwise specified. b. Measurement Range: +3 to -65 dbm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -60 dbm for 850 nm c. Wavelength ID Range: +3 to -50 dbm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dbm for 850 nm d. Tone Detect Range: +3 to -50 dbm 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dbm for 850 nm e. Typical with new battery, per GR-196-Core Issue 2. f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M210e Revision 1A,

161 M210e Hand-held OTDR M210e Models and Included Adapters WAVELENGTHS (nm) DYNAMIC RANGE (db) OTDR PORT ADAPTERS OPM PORT ADAPTERS AFL BASE MODEL NO. 34/33 SC, FC SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210e-20 28/28 SC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210e-22 28/28/34/33 SC, FC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal M210e-25 All M210e OTDRs include a USB flash drive, an AC adapter, UCI switchable adapters for OTDR and OPM ports, trace analysis and documentation software and a quick reference guide. DESCRIPTION M210e QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and 2): M210e QUAD, OLS4, DFS1* in hard case M210e QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2): M210e QUAD, DFS1* in hard case M210e OTDR, SM (1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case M210e OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in hard case M210e OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case M210e OTDR, SM (1310/1550) OPM, VFL in soft case M210e OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in soft case M210e OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in soft case * When ordering, specify DFS1 model (See Accessories Table below). M210e-25K-01-HC2 M210e-25K-01-HC1 M210e-20U-01-HC M210e-22U-01-HC M210e-25U-01-HC M210e-20U-01 M210e-22U-01 M210e-25U-01 When ordering, select options as follows: Optical Configuration (NN), (U) for UPC connection and Language (LL). Add (HC) only if ordering the hard case option. Example: M210e-25U-01-HC -> This model number indicates M210e QUAD with the English/European language pack in the optional hard case. M210e Optical Configuration (NN) 20 = 1310/1550 nm SM 22 = 850/1300 nm MM 25 = 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM OTDR port ferrule (U = UPC) NN U LLL HC Quick Reference Guide Language (LLL)* ENG = English CHS = Chinese, Simplified CHT = Chinese, Traditional DEU = German Hard Case option (HC) (Select (HC) only if ordering hard case option) FRA = French ITA = Italian POL = Polish POR = Portuguese SPA = Spanish TUR = Turkish Accessories DESCRIPTION DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC inspection kit DFS XU DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC inspection kit DFS XA DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit without adapters DFS XN Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a Wet Cleaning kit for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors Dry Cleaning kit *Specify Language for OTDR Quick Reference Guide Basic Cleaning kit with carry case Basic Cleaning kit with MPO Cleaners and carry case One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans) One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) FCP FCP MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ Note: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1, y2). International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. M210e Revision 1A,

162 OTDR Fiber Rings Measuring an insertion loss of the near-end and/or far-end connection of a fiber optic link with an OTDR requires a launch and/or receive test cable. A launch cable, which connects the OTDR to the link under test, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the near-end connection. A receive cable, which connects to the far-end of the link, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the far-end connection. Launch and receive test cables can range from 150 m to 1 km (or longer) in length. Because very long test cables are impractical to transport and use, AFL offers coiled lengths of 50 µm multimode, 62.5 µm multimode, or single-mode fiber packaged in compact rings. FR1-M6-150-SC-ST Fiber Rings of 150 m of fiber are ideal for premises fiber network test applications. Fiber Rings of 500 m and 1 km of single-mode fiber are designed for broadband, long haul fiber network test applications. Fiber Ring Models FR1-SM-1000-SC-ST CONFIGURATION FIBER TYPE FIBER LENGTH Standard, one fiber Multimode, 50 µm, OM2 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M x1- x2 Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM3 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM3-150-x1-x2 Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM4 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM4-150-x1-x2 Standard, one fiber Multimode, 62.5 µm 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M x1- x2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 150 m (492 ft) FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 500 m (1640 ft) FR1-SM-500-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber Single-mode 1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-SM-1000-y1-y2 Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G m (492 ft) FR1-BIF-150-y1-y2 A2 BIF Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G m (1640 ft) FR1-BIF-500-y1-y2 A2 BIF Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657. A2 BIF 1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-BIF-1000-y1-y2 x1, x2 connectors for multimode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] y1, y2 connectors for single-mode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] Other connector types, fiber types, and fiber lengths will be quoted upon request. FR1-SM-150-SC-SC , AFL, all rights reserved. FR Revision 1D,

163 OTDR Fiber Rings How to Generate a Baseline Trace Using Fiber Rings Use the Fiber Ring as a launch cable. Connect the Fiber Ring between your OTDR and the fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the near-end connection. Use the Fiber Ring as a receive cable. Connect the Fiber Ring to the far-end connector of your fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the far-end connection. By using Fiber Rings as both launch and receive cables, as shown in the diagram below, you can measure total insertion loss of the fiber link under test. Fiber ring - launch cable 2 6 Fiber link under test 7 Fiber ring - receive cable Fiber ring connector 1 OTDR port 4 Fusion splice OTDR 3 Near-end connection 5 Far-end connection 8 End of receive cable Example OTDR Test Configuration with Launch and Receive Cables OTDR port 1 8 End of receive cable Near-end connection 2 6 Fiber link under test Fiber ring - launch cable 3 5 Far-end connection Fusion splice 4 7 Fiber ring - receive cable OTDR Trace Made using Launch and Receive Cables International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at , AFL, all rights reserved. FR Revision 1D,

164 Optical Loss Test Kits SMLP, SLP, MLP Series AFL Legacy 30 years of supplying fiber optic solutions. Customer Loyalty Leading Telecommunications and Enterprise customers around the world rely on AFL test sets. With over 100,000 test sets shipped, AFL delivers reliable performance leading the industry with a full 5-year warranty. Features Rugged, dependable, tools backed with 5-year warranty Wave ID supports testing up to three wavelengths simultaneously Field swappable connector adapters provide flexibility Long battery life from globally available AA batteries SMLP5-5 Kit EF Compliant solutions available, see pages 3-4 for details Encircled Flux (EF) Mode Controller Designed for use in outside plant environments Splash resistant controls Withstands one-meter drop test Controls designed for easy operation with gloves Field swappable connector adapters provide flexibility and access for cleaning optical ports at time of test Wave ID - Increase test speed with fewer errors Simultaneous multi-wavelength testing cuts loss measurement time in half or more Automatic wavelength identification eliminates setup errors and simplifies coordination between users at opposite ends of fiber Applications Certify multimode and single-mode links per TIA/EIA standards Passive Optical Networks (PON) testing Certification report generation with TRM 2.0 software Fiber identification prior to splicing Continuity checking , AFL, all rights reserved. OLTK Revision 1B,

165 Optical Loss Test Kits SMLP, SLP, MLP Series Specifications a OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS - POWER METERS MODEL OPM5-4D, OPM4-4D OPM5-3D, OPM4-3D OPM5-2D, OPM4-2D OPM4-1D Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm 850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550 nm 650, 660, 780, 850 nm Detector Type Filtered InGaAs InGaAs Germanium (Ge) Silicon (Si) Measurement Range +26 to -50 dbm +10 to -75 dbm +6 to -60 dbm +6 to -70 dbm Tone Detect Range Wavelength ID Range +6 to -30 dbm +6 to -25 dbm for 850 nm +6 to -30 dbm +6 to -25 dbm for 850 nm +10 to -50 dbm +10 to -45 dbm for 850 nm +10 to -50 dbm +10 to -45 dbm for 850 nm Accuracy b ±0.25 db Resolution 0.01 db Measurement Units db, dbm, μw OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS: OLS7 MODELS MODEL OLS7-FTTX (Single Port) OLS7-FTTH (Single Port) OLS7-3 (Single Port) Wavelength (±20 nm) 1310 nm 1490 nm 1625 nm 1310 nm 1490 nm 1550 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1625 nm Spectral Width 5 nm 3 nm 2 nm 5 nm 3 nm 5 nm 5 nm 5 nm 2 nm Emitter Type Laser Safety Class bclass I FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : Output Power -5 dbm (typical), 9/125 fiber Output Stability ±0.05 db over 1 hour (after 15 minutes warm-up) ±0.1 db over 8 hours (after 15 minutes warm-up) 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz Tone Output OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS: OLS4, OLS2-DUAL & OLS1-DUAL MODELS MODEL OLS4 (MM Optical Port) OLS4 (SM Optical Port) +6 to -50 dbm +6 to -45 dbm for 850 nm +6 to -50 dbm +6 to -45 dbm for 850 nm OLS2-DUAL (Single Port) +6 to -45 dbm OLS1-DUAL (Single Port b ) Wavelength 850 ±30 nm /-20 nm 1310 ±20 nm 1550 ±20 nm 1310 ±20 nm 1550 ±20 nm 850 ±30 nm /-20 nm Spectral Width 45 nm (typ) 120 nm (typ) 5 nm (max) 5 nm (max) 5 nm (max) 45 nm (typ) 120 nm (typ) Emitter Type LED Laser Laser LED Safety Class Class I FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : Output Power >-20 dbm, 62.5 μm multimode c 0 dbm, 9 μm single-mode 0 dbm, 9 μm single-mode d >-20 dbm, 62.5 μm multimode c Output Stability ±0.1 db over 8 hours (after 5 minutes warm-up) ±0.05 db over 1 hour (after 15 minutes warm-up) ±0.1 db over 8 hours (after 15 minutes warm-up) ±0.1 db over 8 hours (after 5 minutes warm-up) Tone Output N/A 2 khz 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 khz, 2 khz N/A GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS: ALL OPM AND OLS MODELS Available Adapters Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Size (H x W x D) Weight SC FC, ST, LC 2 AA batteries -10 C to 50 C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) -30 C to 60 C, 90 % RH (non-condensing) 14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in) 0.29 kg (0.65 lb) Notes: a. All specifications valid at 25 C unless otherwise specified. b. May be used to test 50 or 62.5 μm fiber with supplied mandrels. c. Output power will be approximately 3 db less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper. d. Adjustable 2 db , AFL, all rights reserved. OLTK Revision 1B,

166 Optical Loss Test Kits SMLP, SLP, MLP Series Part Number Connector Specification Model Number (M) M = Model Number () above Examples: SMLP5-5-SC => (SMLP5-5 Test Kit with SC adapters) SLP4-6D-LC => (SLP4-6D Test Kit with LC adapters) M CC Connector Type (CC) CC = FC, SC, ST, LC Test kits include light source, power meter, protective rubber boots, AA batteries, and adapter caps in a protective carry case. Kits with OPM5 power meter include USB cable and PC reporting tool TRM 2.0 Windows compatible software. Kits with multimode sources include 50 and 62.5 µm fiber mandrels. POWER LIGHT FIBER LOSS MEASUREMENTS (nm) DYNAMIC RANGE (db) TRM 2.0 PC METER SOURCE TYPE REPORTING TOOL SMLP5-5 OPM5-2D OLS4 MM SM 850/1300 nm a 1310/1550 nm b SMLP4-4 OPM4-2D OLS4 MM SM 850/1300 nm a 1310/1550 nm b SLP5-FTTx OPM5-3D OLS7-FTTx SM 70 b SLP5-FTTH OPM5-4D OLS7-FTTH SM 45 b SLP5-7 OPM5-4D OLS7-3 SM 45 b SLP5-6D OPM5-4D OLS2-DUAL SM 50 b SLP5-6 OPM5-3D OLS2-DUAL SM 70 b SLP4-FTTx OPM4-3D OLS7-FTTx SM 70 b SLP4-FTTH OPM4-4D OLS7-FTTH SM 45 b SLP4-7 OPM4-4D OLS7-3 SM 45 b SLP4-6D OPM4-4D OLS2-DUAL SM 50 b SLP4-6 OPM4-3D OLS2-DUAL SM 70 b MLP5-2D OPM5-2D OLS1-DUAL MM SM MLP4-2D OPM4-2D OLS1-DUAL MM SM Notes: a. On 62.5/125 µm multimode fiber. b. On 9/125 µm single-mode fiber. 850/1300 nm a 1300 nm b 850/1300 nm a 1300 nm b , AFL, all rights reserved. OLTK Revision 1B,

167 Optical Loss Test Kits SMLP, SLP, MLP Series Encircled Flux Compliance For EF Compliant applications, use AFL Mode Controller Jumpers (MCJ) on multimode ports. Plug MCJ input into an LED test source for EF Compliant output meeting TIA B and IEC Note: MCJs are one directional (input to output). Order output connector styles matching networks to test. Select from the Accessories table below. Accessories DESCRIPTION LIGHT SOURCE CONNECTOR ADAPTERS FC connector adapter MR SC connector adapter MR ST connector adapter MR LC connector adapter MR POWER METER CONNECTOR ADAPTERS FC connector adapter SC connector adapter ST connector adapter LC connector adapter ENCIRCLED FLUX (EF) MODE CONTROLLER FC to FC, 50/125 µm MR FC to FC, 2.5/125 µm MR SC to SC, 50/125 µm MR SC to SC, 62.5/125 µm MR SC to LC, 50/125 µm MR SC to LC, 62.5/125 µm MR MULTIMODE TEST CORDS (50/125 µm 2 meters) FC/FC SC/ST SC/SC LC/LC DESCRIPTION SINGLE-MODE TEST CORDS (9/125 µm 2 meters) FC/FC FC/ST ST/ST SC/SC FC/SC SC/ST SC/LC FC/LC LC/LC MATING ADAPTERS (Bulkheads) FC/FC MR SC/SC MR ST/ST LC/LC CLEANING SUPPLIES One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC MZ One-Click Cleaner LC MZ Cletop SB Cassette Cleaner MZ Cletop SB Refill Cartridge MZ International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at , AFL, all rights reserved. OLTK Revision 1B,

168 VFI2 and HiLite Visual Fault Identifiers Features Visible red laser source, 650 nm High power, 1 mw into single-mode fiber Universal connector interface for quick connection 2.5 mm universal adapter (included) accepts PC and angled FC, SC, ST, etc. connectors 1.25 mm universal adapter (available and/or included) accepts LC and MU connectors Applications Identify fiber faults inside OTDR dead-zone Identify sharp bends or breaks in fibers Identify poorly mated connectors Verify AFL FASTConnect connector installation VFI2 Visual Fault Identifier Visual fault identifiers are visible red lasers designed to inject light energy into a fiber. Sharp bends, breaks, faulty connectors and other faults will leak red light generated by a VFI, allowing technicians to visually spot the defects. The AFL VFI models deliver 1 mw of output power into single-mode fiber to ensure long range and exceptional brightness for locating defects in single-mode or multimode fibers. A VFI is a useful addition to any fiber optic field tool kit. It can locate faults inside an OTDR s dead zone, perform quick continuity checks, trace fibers, check splices and field installed connectors. The AFL visual fault identifier (VFI) is offered in two models: HiLite - miniature key-chain mountable VFI VFI2 - hand-held VFI with rugged protective boot offering longer battery runtime VFIs are important troubleshooting tools for fiber optic networks. AFL s solutions meet every need. The small HiLite is easy to carry anywhere - always available when you need it. The addition of the protective boot on the VFI2 provides an extremely robust field tool that can handle the rigors of any field test environment. HiLite Visual Fault Identifier or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. VFI Revision PB,

169 VFI2 and HiLite Visual Fault Identifiers Specifications a OPTICAL VFI2 HiLite Emitter Type Laser, Class II FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : Wavelength 650 nm ±20 nm Output Power 1 mw (into single-mode fiber) Modulation 2 Hz or CW selected 2 Hz GENERAL Adapter 2.5 mm Universal, 1.25 mm Universal Power 2 AA alkaline batteries (60 hours typical) 1 AAA alkaline battery (16 hours typical) Operating Temperature -10 C to 50 C, 85 % humidity non condensing Storage Temperature -30 C to 60 C, 95 % humidity non condensing Size (H x W x D) 14.0 x 6.2 x 3.2 cm (5.5 x 2.4 x 1.3 in) 7.0 x 3.6 x 1.5 cm (2.8 x 1.4 x 0.6 in) Weight <200 g (7.06 oz) 50 g (1.75 oz) VFI2 Models DESCRIPTION VFI2 visual fault identifier with 2.5 mm adapter VFI2 visual fault identifier with 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm adapters VFI PR VFI PR HiLite Models DESCRIPTION HiLite visual fault identifier with 2.5 mm adapter HiLite visual fault identifier with 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm adapters VFI PR VFI PR Adapters DESCRIPTION 2.5 mm universal adapter b with captivated sleeve MR 1.25 mm universal adapter c with captivated sleeve MR Notes: a. All specifications valid at 25 C unless otherwise specified. b. 2.5 mm universal adapter accepts SC, FC, ST, E2000 ferrules. c mm universal adapter accepts LC, MU ferrules. International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. VFI Revision PB,

170 OFS300 Optical Microscope Features Laser safety filter installed 200x image size 2.5 mm Universal adapter included Low battery LED indicator Long battery life with 2 x AA alkaline Rugged, hand-held, easy-to-use Tripod mount Applications Verify jumper ends are clean prior to connecting to network Inspect end-faces for scratches or pits Eliminate the most common network fault (bad connectors) Inspect patch cords with AFL s OFS300. Designed for field use, the OFS300 scope delivers a high quality end-face image at 200x magnification. Quickly identify scratches, dirt or other problems normally associated with poor network performance. Fact: A large percentage of network failures are caused by dirty or damaged end-faces on fiber optic connectors. Inspecting jumper end-faces prior to connection is critical to network performance. The OFS300 scope provides a quality optical inspection tool at an affordable price. Safety: A built-in laser safety filter provides >40 db IR protection to reduce risk of injury to the eye if accidentally viewing an active fiber. The OFS300 features a Universal adapter cap mount that accepts a variety of thread-on style adapter caps (ordered separately) to ease inspection of many connector style. A momentary power switch located on the top panel keeps one hand free for focusing. For stationary work, the tripod mount allows the OFS300 to attach to any standard tripod. The OFS300 offers 60 hours of continuous battery life from standard 2 x AA batteries and features an LED indicator, which will flash when batteries require replacement. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. OFS Revision WA,

171 OFS300 Optical Fiberscope Specifications a OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS Nominal Magnification 200X Adapter Mount Universal, thread-on Safety Filter Schott KG3, >40 db IR GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Operating Temperature 0 C to +50 C Storage Temperature -20 C to +50 C Power 2 x AA batteries Battery Life >60 hours Weight in Use 0.67 kg (1.5 lb) Size (H x W x D) 13 x 5 x 20 cm (5 x 2 x 8 in) Note: a. All specifications valid at 25 C unless otherwise specified. DESCRIPTION OFS300 Inspection Kit. Includes OFS300 Inspection Scope, 2 x AA batteries, neck strap, 2.5 mm Universal adapter cap, users guide. OFS300 OFS300 UPC/APC MPO Inspection and Cleaning Kit. Includes OFS300, MPO APC (8 ) adapter tip, MPO UPC adapter tip, 2.5 mm Universal MPOK-AU-OPTX adapter tip, One-Click MPO Cleaner, Optixx Precision Lens and Instrument Cleaning kit, hard case, 2 x AA batteries, neck strap, users guide. OFS300 UPC MPO Inspection and Cleaning Kit. Includes OFS300 Inspection Scope, MPO UPC adapter tip, 2.5 mm Universal adapter tip, MPOK-XU-OPTX One-Click MPO Cleaner, Optixx Precision Lens and Instrument Cleaning kit, hard case, 2 x AA batteries, neck strap, users guide. OFS300 APC MPO Inspection and Cleaning Kit. Includes OFS300 Inspection Scope, MPO APC (8 ) adapter tip, 2.5 mm Universal adapter tip, MPOK-AX-OPTX One-Click MPO Cleaner, Optixx Precision Lens and Instrument Cleaning kit, hard case, 2 x AA batteries, neck strap, users guide. OFS300 UPC/APC MPO Upgrade for OFS300 Owners. Includes MPO APC (8 ) adapter tip, MPO UPC adapter tip, One-Click MPO Cleaner, MPOK-AU-OPTU Optixx Precision Lens and Instrument Cleaning Kit, hard case. OFS300 UPC MPO Upgrade Kit for OFS300 Owners. Includes MPO UPC adapter tip, One-Click MPO Cleaner, Optixx Precision Lens and MPOK-XU-OPTU Instrument Cleaning kit, hard case. OFS300 APC MPO Upgrade Kit for OFS300 Owners. Includes MPO APC (8 ) adapter tip, One-Click MPO Cleaner, Optixx Precision Lens and MPOK-AX-OPTU Instrument Cleaning kit, hard case. OFS300 angled SC adapter tip OFS300 angled FC adapter tip OFS300 angled E-2000 adapter tip OFS300 angled MTP/MPO adapter tip OFS300 UPC MTP/MPO adapter tip OFS mm Universal male adapter tip OFS mm Universal male adapter tip OFS300 SMC 0 adapter tip OFS mm (pin) adapter tip OFS mm (pin) adapter tip OFS300 EC (radial) adapter tip OFS /2.5 mm (2-position) Universal adapter tip International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. OFS Revision WA,

172 FTS2 Series Fiber Optic Talk Sets FTS2 FTS-20C Fiber optic talk sets are an inexpensive solution to meet your communication needs when testing multimode or single-mode fiber optic cables. Designed for voice communication over spare fibers, they provide full duplex, hands-free operation. Ease-of-use and compact size allow the operators to focus on the task at hand, rather than operating the talk set. FTS2 talk sets exel at long-range single-mode applications and provide solid multimode performance. The FTS2 includes a multi-party communication feature, which provides the connection of two talk sets at a common site to extend the range or to include three or more persons in the conversation. FTS-20C Clip-on Coupler A clip-on coupler is available for bare fiber access where terminated ends are not available. The FTS-20C allows bi-directional communication from the center point on a single-mode fiber link or from the unterminated end. When used with a fiber talk set, such as the FTS2, the user can access the intended talk fiber at the mid-point across the span, usually at the splice enclosure. The FTS-20C can also be used in conjunction with a laser source or a tone detector to inject or detect 2 khz test tones. It works at 1310, 1550 or 1625 nm. Coupling efficiency is approximately 18 db. Features Single fiber, full duplex Single-mode fiber Field portable, hands-free operation Automatic connection Multi-party communication Digital technology Call-back feature/ringing Applications Voice communication over optical fiber links Testing schedule not impacted by cell phone coverage Military and other secure locations , AFL, all rights reserved. FTS Revision M,

173 FTS Series Fiber Optic Talk Sets Specifications a MODEL FTS FTS OPTICAL Wavelength 1310 nm 1550 nm Dynamic Range MM/SM 20 b /45 db 20 b /45 db Distance Range (km) Multimode (OM1-OM4) >20 SMF 28e c 128 Fiber Type Connector Emitter Type > MM/SM FC, SC, ST, LC Laser Emitter Classification Class I FDA 21 CFR and , IEC : GENERAL Power 4 AA alkaline or AC adapter Weight in Use 0.52 kg (1.16 lb) Size (H x W x D) 18.5 x 11.1 x 4.6 cm (7.3 x 4.4 x 1.8 in) Operating Temperature Storage Temperature 0ºC to +50ºC, RH 0 to 90 % non-condensing -20ºC to +50ºC, RH 0 to 90 % non-condensing INCLUDES Protective rubber boot, batteries, headset, carry case Protective rubber boot, batteries, headset, carry case FTS CC d, e FTS CC d, e Calibration Plans AFL recommends annual calibrations on NOYES Test and Inspection products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration service, express calibration services and access to the NOYES product knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty (three years total coverage). MODEL (2 YR CAL PLAN) (2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN) FTS2 (pair) CAL2-00-FTS2 CAL2-01-FTS2 Notes: a. All specifications valid at 25 C unless otherwise specified. b. Typical. c nm, nm. d. Fiber Optic Talk Sets are purchased in pairs. Two units required for communication. e. Where CC indicates adapter: FC, SC, ST, LC (must pick one). Additional adapters may be ordered separately. NOYES International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at , AFL, all rights reserved. FTS Revision M,

174 One-Click Cleaner Series Features Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters Low cost per clean Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS) Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini versions available Available with enlarged cleaning area up to 2 mm Duplex LC version available MPO/MTP version available The Original One-Click Cleaner MU/LC SC/ST/FC ODC The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One- Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible click is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned. The One-Click Cleaner is a must-have for field technicians. Small enough to fit in a shirt pocket and a great addition to cleaning kits. Save your wrist no more twist! Rugged ODC Version Mini-100 MU/LC Mini-100 SC, ST, FC With the increasing demand of Outdoor Connector (ODC) plug and socket styles, the ODC One-Click Cleaner, which cleans the ferrules in ODC plug, socket and 1.25 mm ferrules, is an essential cleaning tool for WiMax Base Station, Fiber-to-the-Antenna, Broadcasting and Surveillance Video technicians. Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini Mini-500 MU/LC Mini-500 SC, ST, FC Offering the same technology and performance as the original, the One-Click Cleaner is now available in a smaller, more compact size, which allows for cleaning of connectors in tighter places. Its smaller size also makes it a great addition to test kits and cleaning kits. The One-Click Mini that is offered by AFL as a low cost solution with 100+ cleans per unit is now also available with same 500+ cleans per unit as the standard One-Click. The One-Click Mini is an effective, easy-to-use cleaning solution for SC, ST, FC, LC, MU and TFOCA connectors. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved Revision 1H,

175 One-Click Cleaner Series One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 The One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 has an enlarged cleaning area to clean more of the connector end-face. Cleaning up to a 2 mm diameter area of the connector end-face, the One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 is a superior cleaner for SC, ST, and FC connectors. One-Click Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC) Reduce cleaning time with the new One-Click Cleaner D-LC. Offering the same performance and easy-to-use one-click technology as the original, the One-Click Cleaner D-LC cuts cleaning time in half by effectively cleaning both LC connectors of a duplex LC at one time duplex LC cleans per cleaner (1000+ LC connector cleans). D-LC (Duplex LC) 2.5 Ultra One-Click Cleaner MPO One-Click Cleaner MPO Designed to clean MPO and MTP multi-fiber connectors used in Data Centers and other high density optical networks, the new One-Click Cleaner MPO is a revolutionary push-type cleaner, which simplifies cleaning of the ferrule end-face of both MPO/ MTP exposed connectors and connectors in adapters. As with all One-Click Cleaners, the One-Click Cleaner MPO uses the innovative push-to-clean design. The mechanical push action advances the optical grade cleaning tape while effectively and gently cleaning the end-face of the connector. MODEL DESCRIPTION LENGTH BASE One-Click SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) MZ One-Click MU/LC One-Click Cleaner MU/LC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) MZ One-Click ODC One-Click Cleaner ODC (outdoor connector, 500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in) 17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) MZ One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100 cleans) mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) MZ One-Click Mini-100 MU/LC One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 MU/LC (100 cleans) mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) MZ One-Click Mini-500 SC, ST, FC One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 SC, ST, FC (500 cleans) mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) MZ One-Click Mini-500 MU/LC One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 MU/LC (500 cleans) mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) MZ One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 SC, ST, FC mm (8 in) 22.2 x 33.3 mm (0.8 x 1.3 in) MZ (enlarged cleaning area, 500 cleans) One-Click D-LC One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 195 mm (7.7 in) 18 x 30 mm (0.7 x 1.2 in) MZ One-Click MPO One-Click Cleaner MPO (MPO/MTP, 500 cleans) mm (8 in) 19 x 44.5 mm (0.8 x 1.8 in) MZ International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved Revision 1H,

176 Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of many leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years Cletop is a name you can rely on. Cletop -S Series Cletop Series Why Clean Fiber Connectors? Pits and scratches are often caused by dirt Dust, dirt, oils, etc. are everywhere and will migrate to exposed connector end-faces Dirty connectors attenuate signal levels and can increase digital bit error rates Always clean both connectors when mating / unmating to avoid contamination transfer Cletop Cassette Cleaner Options Cletop Series - Original version (proven reliability) Cletop S Series - Second generation cleaner offering the same Cletop cleaning performance with Drop-in replacement tape cartridge and ergonomic design that works equally well for left or right handed operators Type A and -SA - Designed for single 2.5mm ferrules (SC, FC, ST, & D4) Type B and -SB - Cleans SC, SC2, FC, ST, DIN, D4, MU, LC, MT, MPO/MTP without pins, MT-RJ without pins Type MPO - Accepts MPO/MTP connectors with pins Type MT-RJ - Accepts MT-RJ connectors with pins Features Compact and lightweight design is ideal for use in laboratories, assembly lines, or in the field Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze) Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use minimizing unwanted dust Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape Over 400 wipes per tape or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved Revision 1E,

177 Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series Specifications Size Weight 130 x 75 x 40 mm (5.1 x 3.0 x 1.6 in) 160 g/0.35 lb DESCRIPTION CLETOP S SERIES Cletop -SA with Blue Tape Cletop -SB with Blue Tape Cletop -SB with White Tape Replacement Tape Type S - Blue Replacement Tape Type S - White CLETOP ORIGINAL SERIES Cletop Type A with Blue Tape Cletop Type A with White Tape Cletop Type B with Blue Tape Cletop Type B with White tape Cletop for MT-RJ with pins (White Tape) Cletop for MPO/MTP with pins (White Tape) Replacement Tape Blue Replacement Tape White MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved Revision 1E,

178 FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residuefree solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces and bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing. The 3-way dispenser is intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with connector cleaning and termination kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally. Offering high purity and fast consistent cleaning, FCC2 was developed with and is packaged by Micro Care Corporation, a world leader in cleaning solvents. Features Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo Unique dispenser for use with AFL Connector Cleaning Tips and FiberWipes Up To 400+ cleanings per can Dries without a residue, unlike alcohol Dissipates static charge Safe on all surfaces including soft plastics Applications Cleans all types of connector end-faces Cleans bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing Removes oils, salts, dust, dirt and uncured epoxies Safe on glass, ceramic, metal, plastic optical fiber Compact size fits easily into tool kits, instrument cases, termination kits, and inspection kits Perfectly cleans all optic components EU RoHS and WEEE Compliant FCC2 is certified as a lead-free product and meets RoHS and WEEE standards. Health and Safety Data Flashpoint (TCC) None Weight 3 oz / 85 g Safety Rating Nonflammable NFPA Health: 3 Fire: 1 Instability: 0 HMIS: Health: 1 Flammability: 1 Physical: 0 Transportation Not regulated DESCRIPTION Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid in 3 oz / 85 g can Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid, Case of 12 cans FCC FCC or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. FCC Revision 1F,

179 FiberWipes New Material New Packaging Superior Wipes Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered fiber optic grade. FiberWipes are available in rugged mini-tubs (90 wipes) or in hermetically sealed individual packages (FiberAide 1) and are the perfect size for tool kits and test kits. FiberWipes Applications Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces FiberWipes Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use Octagonal cover minimizes rolling distance if dropped Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning Instructions for use on the side of the tub Features FiberAide 1 Lint free Sized for fiber and connector cleaning Robust and tear-resistant FiberAide 1 Hermetically sealed wipes remain uncontaminated and ready for use Foil backed wipes protect skin from cleaning solvents and cable gel Packaging contains no glues to leach out Button hole for placement on panel board or keychain Ideal for shipping with OEM equipment to prevent contamination of fiber surfaces at installation Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning Pictorial instructions on each package Specifications PRODUCT WIPE SIZE PACKAGE SIZE PACKAGE WEIGHT FiberWipes 4.25 W x 2 H 3 Dia x 3 H 2.6 oz FiberAide W x 1.5 H 4.25 W x 2.75 H 0.6 oz / 10 packets FiberWipes is a trademark of MicroCare Corporation. FiberAide 1 is patent pending. DESCRIPTION FiberWipes case of 24 mini-tubs (2160 total wipes, 90 wipes per mini-tub) FiberAide 1 case of 600 packets (60 bundles, 10 packets per bundle) MZ MZ International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603)

180 FCP1 Fiber Optic Cleaning Kits AFL offers a complete selection of fiber optic cleaning kits for field cleaning of connector end faces in fiber frames, adapters and on jumpers. Using our FCC2 Enhanced Formula non-hazardous cleaning fluid and CCT molded cleaning tips, the AFL cleaning kits deliver compact, safe, easy to use, reliable cleaning for all types of fiber optic connector end faces including Military and Multiple Fiber Ferrule designs. Kit Contents by Application FCP1 Series Cleaning Kit C Cleaning Kit APPLICATION CLEANING DESCRIPTION MATERIALS For cleaning connector FCC2 Optical quality cleaning and preparation fluid end-faces within CCTS mm cleaning tips for FC, SC, ST type standard connectors alignment sleeves CCTS mm cleaning tips for LC, MU type small form factor (bulkhead adaptors, connectors female socket CCTS mm cleaning tips for 2.0 mm and 1.6 mm termini in military connectors) connectors and D4 connectors For cleaning ferrule FCC2 Optical quality cleaning and preparation fluid end-faces that are Cletop Reel type cleaner exposed (jumpers and CCTP-25 Universal cleaning tip for exposed ferrule and termini end-faces patch cords) on jumpers or military connectors For cleaning FCC2 Optical quality cleaning and preparation fluid alignment sleeves ACT mm swabs for FC, SC, ST type standard connectors ACT mm swabs for LC, MU type small form factor connectors Cletop Stick-Type 2.0 mm swabs for D4 connectors Additional options MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) VS300 Video microscope for end-face inspection For cleaning fibers FCC2 Optical quality cleaning and preparation fluid prior to fusion splicing or installing FAST connectors FiberWipes Lint free, tear-resistant wipes See individual data sheets for specification on individual supplies. A wide variety of pre-stocked kits makes ordering easy. Choose from the standard kits listed on the page 2 or call us at for a custom kit to meet your application needs. To keep your cleaning kits stocked and ready for use, page 3 lists individual cleaning items (refills). or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. FCP Revision 1H,

181 AFL Cleaning Kits Selection Guide Cleaning Supplies A wide variety of pre-stocked kits offer a complete selection of fiber optic cleaning products for field cleaning of connector end faces in fiber frames, adapters, and on jumpers. Each kit consists of a wall or rack mountable carry case, FCC2 cleaning fluid, and color-coded instructions. Each VS300 Scope includes 2.5 mm universal cap. Each stick is double ended, designed for two (2) cleanings. Wall/Rack Mountable Field Portable Cleaning Kits CCTS MZ CCTS MZ CCTS MZ CCTP MZ CCTX-MT-0900MZ for FC, SC, ST adapt. for LC, MU adapt. for D4, Mil socket adapt. for all connectors for MTP, MPO, MPX Cletop VS300 OLD NO. QTY= 40, BLUE QTY= 40, GREEN QTY= 40, ORANGE QTY= 20, YELLOW QTY= 20, PINK Type Scope FCP A FCP SB FCP SB FCP FCP FCP1-37A FCP FCP1-25D 3 1 FCP FCP1-37C SB FCP FCP1-37D FCP PZ a 2 2 SB FCP PZ d SB FCP SB 1 a FCP a FCP A 1 FCP SB 1 a Hard Case Cleaning Kits CCTS MZ for FC, SC, ST adapters QTY= 40, BLUE CCTS MZ for LC, MU adapters QTY= 40, GREEN CCTP MZ for all connectors QTY= 20, YELLOW Cletop Type VS300 Scope FCP PF d SB 1 b FCP PF c, d SB 1 b C AFL Connector/Adapter Cleaning Kit. Ships in a hard carry case with: Cletop SB (Qty = 1), replacement reel for Cletop SB (Qty = 1), ACT-01 cleaning tips for 2.5 mm adapters (Qty = 20), FiberWipes (Qty = 2 tubs), can of FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid (Qty = 1). Notes: a. Includes 2.0 mm and 1.25 mm Universal cap. b. Includes 1.25 mm Universal cap. c. Includes One-Click SC/ST/FC and One-Click LC/MU. d. Includes a tub of FiberWipes. or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. FCP Revision 1H,

182 AFL Cleaning Kit Restocking Guide Cleaning Fluids and CCT Double Ended Cleaning Sticks For best results, use CCT sticks with FCC2 fluid. DESCRIPTION FCC2 Enhanced Formula Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid- optical quality cleaning fluid for cleaning connector end-faces and cleaning optical fiber (after striping) before field termination or fusion splicing. Nonflammable, not hazardous, not regulated (including air-cargo). Connector Cleaning Tips for exposed 2.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.6 mm ferrules and termini (FC, SC, ST, LC, MU, etc., jumpers and male Mil C & 28876). Yellow (20 sticks per tube). Connector Cleaning Tips for 2.5 mm ferrule in adapters or sockets (SC, FC, ST, etc. in adapters). Blue (40 sticks per tube). Connector Cleaning Tips for 1.25 mm ferrule in adapters or sockets (LC, MU, etc., in adapters). Green (40 sticks per tube). Connector Cleaning Tips for MT-RJ connectors and 2.0 mm and 1.6 mm termini in sockets (female Mil C & and MT-RJ both jumpers and adapters). Orange (40 sticks per tube). Connector Cleaning Tips for Biconic & MT ferrule connectors both jumpers and in adapters (Biconic, MTP, MPO, MPX, etc.) Pink (20 sticks per tube). FCC (can) FCC (12 cans) CCTP MZ CCTS MZ CCTS MZ CCTS MZ CCTX-MT-0900MZ Cletop Cassette Cleaner Options DESCRIPTION Cletop S Series Cletop SA with Blue Tape Cletop SB with Blue Tape Cletop SB with White Tape Replacement Tape Type S - Blue Replacement Tape Type S - White Cletop Original Series Cletop Type A with Blue Tape Cletop Type A with White Tape Cletop Type B with Blue Tape Cletop Type B with White Tape Cletop for MT-RJ with pins (White Tape) Cletop for MPO/MTP with pins (White Tape) Replacement Tape Blue Replacement Tape White MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ MZ One-Click Cleaners DESCRIPTION One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans) One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans) MZ MZ or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. FCP Revision 1H,

183 AFL Cleaning Kit Restocking Guide Cletop (ACT) Cleaning Sticks DESCRIPTION ACT mm single-ended sticks (box of 200) for FC, SC, ST, D4 ACT mm single-ended sticks (box of 200) for LC, MU ACT mm single-ended sticks (box of 200) for military and high-definition video (LEMO) MZ MZ MZ 2.0/2.5 mm double-ended sticks (box of 100) for military and high-definition video (LEMO) MZ FiberWipes DESCRIPTION FiberWipes case of 24 mini-tubs (2160 total wipes, 90 wipes per mini-tub) FiberAide 1 case of 600 packets (60 bundles,10 packets per bundle) MZ MZ Refills for Test & Inspection Kits DESCRIPTION INCLUDES Wet Cleaning Kit MZ, Cletop-SB CCTS , Connector Cleaning Tips for 2.5 mm ferrule in adapters or sockets (SC, FC, ST in adaptors). Blue (1 tube = 40 sticks). CCTS , Connector Cleaning Tips for 1.25 mm ferrule in adapters or sockets (LC, MU, etc., in adapters). Green (1 tube = 40 sticks). FCC , Optical Quality Cleaning and Preparation Fluid for connector end-faces and fiber before splicing and terminating. Dry Cleaning Kit MZ, Cletop -SB MZ, ACT mm adapter cleaning tips Qty = International Sales and Service Contact Information Available at or (800) , (603) , AFL, all rights reserved. FCP Revision 1H,

184 Fiber Optic Cable or (800)

185 Fiber Optic Cable or (800)

186 Fiber Optic Cable or (800)

187

188 CAT